summaryrefslogtreecommitdiff
path: root/old/64138-0.txt
diff options
context:
space:
mode:
Diffstat (limited to 'old/64138-0.txt')
-rw-r--r--old/64138-0.txt7820
1 files changed, 0 insertions, 7820 deletions
diff --git a/old/64138-0.txt b/old/64138-0.txt
deleted file mode 100644
index f9826ca..0000000
--- a/old/64138-0.txt
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,7820 +0,0 @@
-The Project Gutenberg eBook of The psychology of sleep, by Bolton Hall
-
-This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere in the United States and
-most other parts of the world at no cost and with almost no restrictions
-whatsoever. You may copy it, give it away or re-use it under the terms
-of the Project Gutenberg License included with this eBook or online at
-www.gutenberg.org. If you are not located in the United States, you
-will have to check the laws of the country where you are located before
-using this eBook.
-
-Title: The psychology of sleep
-
-Author: Bolton Hall
-
-Release Date: December 26, 2020 [eBook #64138]
-
-Language: English
-
-Character set encoding: UTF-8
-
-Produced by: Turgut Dincer, Les Galloway and the Online Distributed
- Proofreading Team at https://www.pgdp.net (This file was
- produced from images generously made available by The Internet
- Archive)
-
-*** START OF THE PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK THE PSYCHOLOGY OF SLEEP ***
- Transcriber’s Notes
-
-Obvious typographical errors have been silently corrected. Variations
-in hyphenation and accents and all other spelling and punctuation
-remains unchanged.
-
-The quotation from Ballad of Reading Gaol, (Chapter VIII) has been
-corrected from
-
- And Sleep will not lie down but walks
- And wild-eyed cries to time.
- to
- And Sleep will not lie down but walks
- Wild-eyed and cries to time.
-
-Footnotes are located at the end of the relevant paragraphs.
-
-Italics are represented thus _italic_.
-
-
-
-
-[Illustration: BOLTON HALL
-
-“THE PSYCHOLOGY OF SLEEP”]
-
-
-
-
- THE PSYCHOLOGY OF
- SLEEP
-
- BY
- BOLTON HALL, M.A.
-
- Author of “Three Acres and Liberty,” “Things as They Are,”
- “Free America,” etc.
-
- With an Introduction
- BY
- EDWARD MOFFAT WEYER, Ph.D.
- Professor of Philosophy, Washington and Jefferson College
-
- [Illustration]
-
-
- NEW YORK
- MOFFAT, YARD AND COMPANY
- 1917
-
-
-
-
- Copyright, 1911, by
- MOFFAT, YARD AND COMPANY
- NEW YORK
-
- _All rights reserved_
- Published October, 1911
-
-
- THE QUINN & BODEN CO. PRESS
- RAHWAY, N. J.
-
-
-
-
- TO THE MEMORY OF
-
- THE REVEREND DR. JOHN HALL
-
- WHO PREACHED FROM THE WORD
- WHAT I TEACH FROM THE WORLD
-
-
-
-
-INTRODUCTION
-
-
-At the request of the author, I have read this book in proof sheets,
-and, from the point of view of one interested in psychology, I have
-suggested many amendments which have all, I think, been adopted.
-
-As will be seen by the intelligent reader, the best sleep involves more
-than a normal body; it involves healthy thought and the application
-to our daily lives of the moral principles laid down by our great
-spiritual teachers.
-
-The cure of sleeplessness has hitherto been left largely to the
-physician, who is not always a specialist on that subject and who
-will welcome a treatise that will enable his patient to co-operate
-with his restorative measures. Mr. Hall has already shown in _Three
-Acres and Liberty_ and in _The Garden Yard_ his ability to put into
-clear, popular language and readable form scientific truths that
-non-scientific people need to know and wish to learn.
-
-The proper management of our own bodies is even more essential to our
-happiness and well-being than the proper management of the land, and I
-hope that this book will be no less welcome to students and physicians
-than to the great mass who for lack of knowledge or of attention do not
-wholly avail themselves of the freely offered gift of sleep.
-
-The book may be useful to many who find it difficult to harmonize their
-lives with their surroundings, and may bring to many a happier view of
-the ways of God to man.
-
- EDWARD MOFFAT WEYER,
- Washington and Jefferson College.
-
-
-
-
-CONTENTS
-
-
- CHAPTER PAGE
-
- I SLEEP 1
-
- II HOW MUCH SLEEP 5
-
- III THE TIME OF SLEEP 11
-
- IV WHAT SLEEP MAY MEAN 15
-
- V HOW TO GO TO SLEEP 20
-
- VI SLEEP IS NATURAL 26
-
- VII THE DUPLEX MIND 30
-
- VIII WAKEFULNESS 36
-
- IX SIMPLE CAUSES OF WAKEFULNESS 40
-
- X “LIGHT” SLEEPERS 47
-
- XI THE GIFTS OF WAKEFULNESS 51
-
- XII THE PURPOSE OF SLEEP 58
-
- XIII THE SLEEP OF THE INVALID 62
-
- XIV THE SLEEPLESSNESS OF PAIN 66
-
- XV OPIATES 73
-
- XVI DEVICES FOR GOING TO SLEEP 78
-
- XVII MORE DEVICES FOR GOING TO
- SLEEP 84
-
- XVIII STILL FURTHER DEVICES 88
-
- XIX HYPNOTIC SLEEP 94
-
- XX “PERCHANCE TO DREAM” 101
-
- XXI NATURAL LIVING 108
-
- XXII FRESH AIR AND REFRESHING
- SLEEP 113
-
- XXIII THE BREATH OF LIFE 117
-
- XXIV EATING AND SLEEPING 124
-
- XXV SLEEPING AND EATING 128
-
- XXVI SOME MODERN THEORIES OF
- SLEEP 133
-
- XXVII EARLY THEORIES OF SLEEP 138
-
- XXVIII MORE THEORIES 142
-
- XXIX STILL MORE THEORIES 147
-
- XXX WE LEARN TO DO BY DOING 153
-
- XXXI VAIN REGRETS 156
-
- XXXII THE LOVE THAT IS PEACE 162
-
- XXXIII THE SPECTER OF DEATH 167
-
- XXXIV A NATURAL CHANGE 175
-
- XXXV THE DISTRUST OF LIFE 180
-
- XXXVI REST AND SLEEP 186
-
- XXXVII THE NEED OF REST 192
-
- XXXVIII SAVING OF EFFORT 196
-
- XXXIX ANTAGONISM 201
-
- XL STRUGGLE IN THE FAMILY 205
-
- XLI UNNATURAL LAWS 210
-
- XLII THE NATURAL LAW 215
-
- XLIII “LETTING GO” 219
-
- XLIV REST IN TRUTH 225
-
- XLV THE SPAN OF LIFE 229
-
- XLVI WASTE STEAM 233
-
- XLVII UNDERSTANDING 238
-
- XLVIII THE SUPERSTITION OF FEAR 246
-
- XLIX IMAGINARY FEARS 251
-
- L ILL SUCCESS 257
-
- LI SOCIAL UNREST 263
-
- LII ECONOMIC REST 269
-
- LIII “IF HE SLEEP HE SHALL DO
- WELL” 275
-
- LIV CONCLUSION 280
-
- APPENDICES AND BIBLIOGRAPHY 284
-
- APPENDIX A 285
-
- APPENDIX B 287
-
- APPENDIX C 288
-
- APPENDIX D 293
-
- APPENDIX E 297
-
-
-
-
-FOREWORD
-
-
-This book is intended no less for those who do sleep well than for
-those who do not. It is just as important to be able to teach others
-to act well as to be able to do so ourselves. To teach we must analyze
-and comprehend our own action and its motives: for being able to do a
-thing well is far different from being able to teach it. In order to
-teach anything we must know how we do it and why others cannot do it.
-We never know anything thoroughly until we have tried to teach it to
-another.
-
-Many persons sleep well only because they are still, like little
-children and animals, in the unreflective stage of life. That is the
-stage of the Natural Man, and it is good in itself; but later the
-mental life awakes, when consciousness of one’s self begins, and
-examination of one’s own desires develops. If not rightly understood or
-if not at least accepted, that development brings anxiety, unrest and
-disturbance of sleep, and breaks the harmony of the whole nature.
-
-The highest stage of development is the spiritual, the all-conscious
-state which includes and harmonizes the other two. In that we do not
-lose the ready, overflowing enjoyment of our bodily exercises and
-functions; rather they are intensified; the physical and the mental are
-united in the complete life.
-
-In order to attain this harmony we must examine the means that we and
-others use to gain rest and peace; some of these are instinctive and
-some prudential, and we must perceive why it is that these means work
-or fail to work in different cases. When, with all our getting, we have
-gotten this understanding, then, and not till then, all action becomes
-natural and joyful, for then we understand it all, and follow willingly
-the leading of the Spirit that is in Man.
-
- Care-charmer Sleep, son of the sable Night,
- Brother to Death, in silent darkness born.
-
- SAMUEL DANIEL.
-
-
-
-
-CHAPTER I
-
-SLEEP
-
- Sancho Panza says: “Now, blessings light on him who first invented
- sleep! Sleep which covers a man all over, thoughts and all, like a
- cloak; and is meat for the hungry, drink for the thirsty, heat for the
- cold, and cold for the hot. Sleep is the current coin that purchases
- all the pleasures of the world cheap, and the balance that sets the
- king and shepherd, the fool and the wise man, even.”—“Don Quixote.”
-
-
-Sleeping is the one thing that everyone practices almost daily all his
-life, and that, nevertheless, hardly anyone does as well as when he
-began. We have improved in our walking, talking, eating, seeing, and
-in other acts of skill and habit; but, in spite of our experience, few
-of us have improved in sleeping: the best sleepers only “sleep like a
-child.” It must be that we do not do it wisely, else we should by this
-time do it well.
-
-Even the race of mankind as a whole does not seem to be able to use
-sleep, to summon it, or to control it any better than primitive
-man did. We talk much of the need of sleep, and sagely discuss its
-benefits, but we know neither how to use the faculty of sleep to the
-best advantage nor how to cultivate it.
-
-Yet for ages men have studied the mystery of sleep. We have acquired
-many interesting facts concerning its variation, and have formulated a
-number of theories concerning its cause and advantages; nevertheless,
-science has given us little real knowledge of sleep, and less mastery
-over it.
-
-Mankind has had idols ever since consciousness began. Advancing
-knowledge has changed the nature and number of the idols, but it has
-not destroyed them. The idol of the present age is “Science,” and
-men worship it in the degree that it seems to fit their needs. They
-forget that Science is merely the knowledge of things and persons,
-arranged and classified, so as to make it available. In its nature
-it is fallible, for some new phase discovered to-day may show that
-yesterday’s conclusion was formed from a theory which itself was based
-on a mistaken premise. Man has caught a glimpse of something that
-resembled truth, has stated it, reasoned about it, and finally either
-established its authority or disproved it utterly through the discovery
-of the real thing he was seeking. Either result was progress, because
-man grows, as Browning says, “through catching at mistake as midway
-help, till he reach fact indeed.” So there is no need to be disturbed
-by the conflicting opinions of men of science touching the purpose or
-method of sleep. Even the rejected theories have added to the sum of
-our knowledge, and the field for investigation is still open to all
-who are faithful in noting and comparing the manifestations of Nature,
-which the scientists call phenomena.
-
-Most of what we call science has to do with physical or material
-things. Consequently, we find scientists dealing mainly with what may
-be called tangible phenomena, those which may be measured or weighed
-or held in the hand or, at least, pinned down by pressure of thumb or
-finger.
-
-Material Science’s estimate of man is largely gauged by
-
- “Things done, that took the eye and had the price;
- O’er which, from level stand,
- The low world laid its hand,
- Found straightway to its mind, could value in a trice.”
-
-This is the almost inevitable result of looking upon life as purely
-material or physical. We must view life as physical, but not physical
-only; as mental, but not mental only; as spiritual, but not spiritual
-only.
-
-In studying sleep and its attendant phenomena all these things must be
-taken into consideration. So slight a thing as fancy may profoundly
-influence our acts; fancies not attributable to any material source, so
-fleeting and evanescent that the clumsy net of language cannot hold
-them, may induce sleep or destroy sleep.
-
-A review of the theories and conclusions of physicians, both scientific
-and unscientific, as well as of others who have found the study of
-sleep of absorbing importance, will find a place in our examination of
-this vital function of organisms.
-
-
-
-
-CHAPTER II
-
-HOW MUCH SLEEP
-
- Six hours in sleep, in law’s grave study six,
- Four spend in prayer, the rest on Nature fix.
- (Translation.) SIR EDWARD COKE.
-
-
-Man is the highest expression yet discovered of the “living organism,”
-and sleep has always taken more of his time than any other function.
-Marie de Manacéïne of St. Petersburg, in her great book called
-“Sleep,” says: “The weaker the consciousness is, the more easily it
-is fatigued and in need of sleep; an energetic consciousness, on the
-contrary, is contented with periods of sleep that are shorter, less
-deep, and less frequent.” Although the consciousness of the race has
-developed and strengthened enormously, and is steadily strengthening
-itself, the old-fashioned idea that one-third of our time should
-be spent in sleep holds the average mind as strongly as ever. We
-insist upon it for the young, impress it upon everybody, and look
-distrustfully upon him who is so daring and unreasonable as to say that
-he requires less than eight hours of sleep. When an idea is intrenched
-in the mind it is next to impossible to drive it out by reason or even
-by repetition.
-
-It is the popular belief that Alfred the Great—who is also Alfred the
-Wise and Alfred the Good (being dead so long)—divided time into three
-equal parts, and taught that one part should be given to sleep. If he
-had said this, it would not follow that it is the last and wisest word
-on the best way to divide our time, but he did not say it. What he
-said was that one-third of each day should be given to sleep, diet and
-exercise: that is, that a man should devote eight hours to sleeping,
-eating and whatever form of exercise or recreation he desired.
-
-There is nothing to show that Alfred spent even six hours in sleep,
-although there is plenty of proof that he recognized the difference
-between rest and sleep, for he gave the second division of the
-day—eight hours—to study and to reflection, while the remaining eight
-hours were to be for business. In those days kings worked hard. Sir
-Henry Sumner Maine says that the list of places where King John held
-court shows that even he was as active as any commercial traveler
-nowadays. (“Early Law and Custom,” p. 183.)
-
-But the superstition that Alfred recommended eight hours for sleep will
-not down, and no amount of argument or proof will change the opinion
-of the average man on this point. “Our forefathers slept eight hours,”
-they say; “so should we.” We forget that probably the rushlight and
-the candle had much to do with the long hours of sleep in olden times.
-As artificial light has improved, sleeping-time has been shortened.
-
-There is an old English quatrain which runs:
-
- “Nature requires five,
- Custom gives seven,
- Laziness takes nine
- And wickedness eleven.”
-
-But sleep is a natural need, and, like any other natural need, varies
-in degree in different persons. Dogs, cats and other animals generally
-sleep more than we do, and their young ones sleep still more. Generally
-speaking, the infant, whose mental powers have barely awakened, who is,
-so far as we can tell, merely a human animal, needs more sleep than it
-will ever need again in its existence. In this great need of sleep the
-human animal resembles other animals.
-
-It frequently happens that, as a man waxes older, he requires less and
-less sleep than in his growing and most active years. But old people
-who have outlived their mental life come to a time when they sleep and
-perform merely the physical functions like the infant; so also with
-those whose energy so far exceeds their physical strength that the mere
-effort of living exhausts them. This condition may be in part due to
-overstrain of the powers of youth and middle age, but it also follows
-the fixed idea that years diminish strength and lessen energy. It is
-easy to fall into this notion, for it accords so well with the general
-idea that rest must come only after the period of activity, whether
-that period be a day or a lifetime.
-
-All of us have had periods when we have needed fewer than our average
-hours of sleep. People who sleep out of doors or in thoroughly
-ventilated rooms, under warm but light clothing, find that they need
-less sleep than when they occupy poorly ventilated rooms and wrap
-themselves in heavy, unhygienic clothing. Fresh discoveries are being
-made almost daily by those who give intelligent consideration to these
-things.
-
-Even babies differ in their need of sleep. I know one healthy,
-happy, beautiful baby who has never slept the average sixteen hours
-that babies are supposed to need. This child is now between three
-and four years of age, and has never gone to sleep before nine or
-half-past nine at night. Her parents had the common idea of long
-hours of sleep for infants, and the child had a hard struggle for a
-while to convince them that she had no such need: such struggles are
-often called “naughtiness.” She was regularly put to bed at seven
-o’clock, and all the usual devices for enticing a baby to sleep were
-practiced. Sometimes she was left severely alone, sometimes she had
-gentle lullabies sung to her, but, whether alone or in company, this
-particular baby played and enjoyed herself until between nine and
-nine-thirty, when she quietly dropped to sleep. She awoke as early as
-the average baby wakes, happy and refreshed, and her parents finally
-learned that there is no sleeping rule that has no exceptions, whether
-applied to infants or adults.
-
-Drowsiness is a sign that we ought to sleep, just as hunger is a sign
-that we ought to eat. Natural wakefulness means that we ought not to
-sleep. The child tries to obey the promptings of nature, but we think
-these promptings are wrong, if not wicked, and force him into all sorts
-of bad habits. Says Michelet, “No consecrated absurdity could have
-stood its ground if the man had not silenced the objections of the
-child.” We are slowly learning that there is no need or function of the
-body or of the mind that is exactly the same in all individuals, or
-that is always the same even in the same individual.
-
-But, in spite of this dawning knowledge, we still view with alarm any
-disregard of the rule, either in ourselves or another; so true it is,
-as Thomas Paine says, that “It is a faculty of the human mind to
-become what it contemplates.” We have looked upon ourselves as having
-certain, unvarying, imperative needs until we have almost become
-subject to them.
-
-
-
-
- CHAPTER III
-
- THE TIME OF SLEEP
-
- “Women, like children, require more sleep normally than men, but
- ‘Macfarlane states that they can better bear the loss of sleep, and
- most physicians will agree with him.’” H. CAMPBELL.
-
-
-The amount of sleep, like the amount of food, required by an individual
-varies greatly, depending largely upon the conditions at the time.
-Edison, for instance, can go days without sleep when engrossed in some
-invention, and he has been quoted as saying that people sleep too much,
-four hours daily being quite sufficient.
-
-In answer to my inquiry, Mr. Edison’s secretary wrote, “Mr. Edison
-directs me to write you that the statement is correct, that for
-thirty years he did not get four hours of sleep per day.” Evidently,
-experience taught him that an average of four hours per day, if taken
-rightly and at the right time, is enough for him. He keeps a couch in
-his workroom so as to sleep when he is sleepy. He does not need a clock
-to tell him when to go to bed, any more than you need a thermometer to
-tell you when to pull up the blankets.
-
-Edison is not alone in his views on sleep. He made extensive
-experiments with the two hundred workers in his own factory which
-convinced him and most of them that the majority slept much too long.
-The hands seem to have entered willingly into the trials: perhaps
-their personal regard for him influenced their conclusions. Napoleon
-Bonaparte and Frederick of Prussia were both satisfied with four hours
-of sleep,[1] while Bishop Taylor was of opinion that three hours was
-sufficient for any man’s needs, and Richard Baxter, who wrote “The
-Saints’ Rest,” thought four hours the proper measure.
-
-[1] It is said, however, that in later life Napoleon carried this too
-far, and was sometimes stupid for lack of sleep.
-
-Paul Leicester Ford, who was never a strong person, once told me that
-he found four hours’ sleep enough for all purposes. He did not wish
-to be understood as saying that four hours’ rest was enough, but four
-hours’ sleep. He was one of the few who understood the difference
-between sleep and rest. He frequently rested; his favorite practice
-being to lie back in a big armchair with a book, and forget the
-surrounding conditions. The book created a different set of sensations,
-which, combined with the pause in physical activity, brought a sense
-of rest to the frail body. He frequently got his four hours of sleep
-curled up in the big chair, and was then able to go on with the work
-which in a few short years made him famous. The wife of the late
-George T. Angell of Boston testifies that for years he seldom slept
-four hours a night, having found that, for him, more was unnecessary;
-but, of course, it does not follow that no more is necessary for anyone.
-
-These are not unusual instances, but rather typical cases. History
-and biography are full of such; each of us can probably mention one
-or more persons among his own acquaintance who can do well with less
-than the usual eight hours of sleep, but we have looked upon them as
-exceptions and perhaps have prophesied that they will feel the evil
-results later, if not now. We usually select ourselves as the standard
-for all other persons, or perhaps it is more correct to say that we are
-prone to select one stage of our own development as a standard, and try
-to compel even our growing self to conform to that stage. When the crab
-outgrows his shell it sloughs off, and, so far as we know, he offers
-no objection, but takes the new shell, which answers his needs better.
-But we, who consider ourselves infinitely superior to the crab, try
-to compel ourselves to keep within the bounds of old thoughts, early
-habits, and outgrown customs after we no longer need them. When we are
-unfortunate enough to succeed, we rejoice at our cramped souls as the
-Chinese woman prides herself upon her crushed, cramped, misshapen foot.
-
-The amount of sleep that suited you last year may not suit you to-day.
-You may really be getting better sleep and so needing less of it: or
-you may have to make up by quantity for a poorer quality. The test
-is that, if you are sleepy in waking hours, you need better sleep or
-more of it. If you are wakeful in sleeping hours, you need less sleep
-or else you are not getting the right kind. Good sleep is a habit, a
-natural habit as distinguished from an acquired habit, and when we
-learn to take it naturally, and in natural amount, we get a great deal
-more from it. It is fair to assume that purely natural habits, which
-continue from age to age through all stages of human progress, are
-essential to human welfare. Otherwise they would drop away from us
-as many useless physical parts have dropped. If you stop to think of
-this, you know that it is so; the man in the street and the girl at the
-ribbon counter do not know, so there is more excuse for them if they
-misunderstand. It may be that they usually sleep better than you do,
-and so do not need to know it.
-
-
-
-
-CHAPTER IV
-
-WHAT SLEEP MAY MEAN
-
- O Sleep, we are beholden to thee, Sleep,
- Thou bearest angels to us in the night,
- Saints out of heaven with palms.
-
- JEAN INGELOW.
-
-
-We know so little about sleep, positively, that anyone may assume one
-thing or another about it, so long as what he assumes accords with what
-we do know positively.
-
-It has been surmised that, during sleep, the subconscious mind is
-busy with the day’s impressions of the objective mind,[2] fitting and
-relating them to past experiences, the sum of which makes up the man
-himself. The subconscious mind is, in a sense, man’s attitude to life.
-It receives suggestions more easily than the objective mind receives
-them, and has more effect upon man’s understanding of life. If our last
-conscious thought is a loving thought toward all living things, we have
-aided the latent mind in its effort to get in tune with the infinite
-harmony of life. Alice Herring Christopher, the metaphysician, once
-told me that every night as she drops off to sleep she says to herself
-that she is going to have a lovely time, and as a consequence she does;
-and that, on waking, she tries to realize how delightful her sleep has
-been.
-
-[2] In an examination of the theory of the “subjective” and the
-“objective mind,” see chap. vii.
-
-There is an old saying that, when a baby smiles in its sleep, it is
-because the angels are whispering to it, and, if we kept ourselves in
-communion with the substance of things, “angels” might bring us sweet
-messages, too. They surely will, if we drop to sleep as lovingly and
-peacefully as a little child.
-
-Another friend of mine, who has the faculty of wearing herself out
-with the excitement of each day’s experiences, is learning to offset
-this unnecessary drain upon her strength by suggesting to herself
-each night, “I shall wake rested and refreshed in the morning.” By
-this means she is gaining in nervous poise, and averting the numerous
-“break-downs” from which she used to suffer. Having made this much
-progress,—which brings her “not far from the kingdom,”—it only remains
-for her to make the full claim for the fulfillment of the promise, “Ye
-shall find rest to your souls,” to secure it.
-
-For the most part, men still regard sleep as a symbol of death, that
-time when we shall know nothing of what goes on about us; when,
-according to general belief, we no longer grow or enjoy. We exclaim
-with Hesiod, “Sleep—the Brother of Death and the Son of Night!” But
-the new idea of sleep as a growing time is overcoming that old idea of
-sleep as death, and is beginning to rob even the great change itself of
-its terrors. We are beginning to see that sleep does not interfere with
-the activity of the mind, but simply gives it an opportunity to digest
-and absorb impressions. In the same way it may be that death does not
-interfere with the activity of the real man, but may afford him an
-opportunity to get the full meaning of the experiences he had while
-sojourning in the objective world.
-
-As it is not conceivable that life began with our individual appearance
-in this world, so it is not likely that it will end when our individual
-consciousness ceases. The sum of what we have learned and of what we
-have done must go on, else all the learning and the doing would be for
-naught. So this thing which was “I”—and will continue to be the sum
-of that “I,” no matter whether I am conscious of it or not—will use
-and absorb all that has been thought or done in the body, and accept or
-reject its results.
-
-It will all count in that next experience, and help us to be, as
-Browning says:
-
- “Fearless and unperplexed
- When I wage battle next,
- What weapons to select, what armor to endue.”
-
-The sum of our experiences added to the sum of all that have gone
-before will help us to understand life better when and wherever we are
-again conscious of it, just as the experiences of each day help us to
-live the next day better. In the active, waking world the perceptive
-mind receives impressions which the reflective mind stores up and
-brings to bear upon our daily life and thought, thus developing greater
-consciousness in the individual; so the interruption of all physical
-activity may be necessary to the further development of the real and
-intangible man.
-
-As one awakes each morning from a night’s sleep a new man, physically
-and mentally, although not necessarily aware of any change, so may our
-awakening be from the last sleep that men call death. It may be that
-we shall arise to new experiences, or perhaps to further development
-in a world that we cannot touch with our hands. But in either case we
-may not doubt that the awakening will be good, for all life is good.
-For, after all, we should know none of the joys of living if we had not
-tried them. Life is consciousness, and hardly one of us would prefer
-never to have lived; to have had no share in that which has meant
-_man_; the growth and culmination of unnumbered centuries. Life is one,
-a whole, and the “slings and arrows” of daily worries and toil are
-only an unimportant part of it. And, if it is so good that we wish
-to stay here and hope to enjoy it, if we can see how it has steadily
-improved and beautified in the ages that have passed, we cannot fail to
-see that all it may yet become will also be good.
-
-
-
-
-CHAPTER V
-
-HOW TO GO TO SLEEP
-
- Sleep sweetly, tender heart in peace!
-
- TENNYSON.
-
-
-Man craves sleep. If we know of a friend who is suffering in body
-or mind we wish him sleep; mothers soothe their pain-racked or
-terrified children to sleep with every gentle art known to them;
-if, for any reason, man is out of harmony with his life as he sees
-it, he instinctively turns to “Nature’s sweet restorer.” It is a
-sovereign balm for many ills, yet we seldom recognize wherein its
-virtue lies. During his waking hours man is frequently at odds with
-his surroundings. He is out of tune with the real things of life and
-is apt to mistake the material side of his life for the whole of his
-being. But when sleeping he is less hampered with the impressions of
-the workaday world, less resistant, and, therefore, more harmonious. It
-is in this mental relaxation that the true benefit of sleep consists.
-
-We have as yet no conception of the immense import of suggestion to
-ourselves or others as a cure for body or mind. Suggestions may often
-be made to a person sound asleep, but they are most effective just at
-the time when the reason and the will are losing control of the mind,
-although consciousness has not yet lost its grip.
-
-Accordingly it helps our growth to relax the whole nature before going
-to sleep and to drop into the mind the thought of peace and harmony;
-the assurance that all is and must be well. To do this is to get the
-best sort of sleep, the sleep that binds us closer to our fellows and
-makes us feel the oneness of all life. This is the sleep from which we
-awake refreshed, ready to take up the day’s duties cheerfully. It is an
-old country saying, when a person seems what is called “out of sorts”
-in the morning, that “he got out on the wrong side of the bed.” But it
-is much more likely that he went to sleep in the wrong way: that is, in
-an unloving frame of mind.
-
-“Let not the sun go down upon your wrath” has a wider significance
-than we usually realize. As a matter of mere physical well-being, if we
-have allowed the lack of knowledge or the selfishness of our brother
-to annoy or irritate us, it is well to wipe away all traces of that
-irritation before lying down to rest. It is well, when possible, to
-seek the “little one” we have offended, through our own ignorance or
-selfishness, and make our peace by confessing the fault; while, if we
-are still self-centered enough to feel that our brother has dealt
-harshly with us, we may remove all the sting by thinking lovingly
-of him. As the soft answer turneth away wrath, so the soft attitude
-turneth out wrath, both from ourselves and from him. Each day should
-complete itself. Sufficient unto the day is the good and the evil
-thereof, and to attempt to carry over the evil through resentment until
-another day is but to lay up trouble for ourselves.
-
-For, after all, it is lack of knowledge or understanding that makes our
-brother unkind to us or us to him. Each is doing the best he can, being
-such a man as he is. Each of us has still some of that separateness
-which makes us regard our own interests as apart from other interests,
-or hostile to them. What our brother does, therefore, he does because
-it seems to him the best thing for himself. As soon as he sees that
-one cannot truly prosper at the expense of another, because we are all
-one, he will give up his stupid ways—as we shall give up our stupid
-ways when we see that same truth. Until then it is useless to be angry
-or upset, for that is only to show that we, too, are unable to see
-the oneness of all. As it is bad for our brother that he is so blind,
-it were more consistent that we should feel sorrow than anger at his
-self-injury.
-
-Epictetus understood that, nineteen hundred years ago, and we have not
-become so stupid as to deny it; we only forget. He saw that there is
-only one kind of motive in all men—they are moved by what they think is
-right and best for themselves. Said he, “It is impossible to judge one
-thing best for me and to seek a different one, to judge one thing right
-and be inclined towards another.” We all know this about ourselves, but
-we do not see it so plainly about others.
-
-If we felt this about all men, we should not have “indignation with
-the multitude.” For what are all their wrongdoings? Is it not that they
-are “mistaken about the things that are good and evil? Shall we then
-be indignant with them, or shall we only pity them?... Show them the
-error and we shall see how they will cease from it when they really see
-it. But, if they do not see the error, they have naught better than the
-deceptive appearance of the thing as it looks to them.” For, argues
-Epictetus, “this man who errs and is deceived concerning things of the
-greatest moment is blinded, not in the vision that distinguished black
-and white, but in the judgment which distinguished Good and Evil.... If
-it is the greatest misfortune to be deprived of the greatest things,
-and the greatest thing in every man is a _Will_ such as he ought to
-have, and if one be deprived of this, why are we still indignant with
-him?... We need not be moved contrary to Nature by the evil deeds of
-other men. Pity them rather, be not inclined to offense and hatred....
-When someone may do us an injury or speak ill of us, remember that he
-does it or speaks it, believing that it is meet and best for him to do
-so. It is not possible, then, that he can do the thing that appears
-best to you, but the thing that appears best to him. Wherefore, if good
-appears evil to him, it is he that is injured, being deceived. For, if
-anyone takes a true consequence to be false, it is not the consequence
-that is injured, but he is injured who is deceived. Setting out, then,
-with these opinions, you will bear a gentle mind toward any man who
-may injure you. For, say on each occasion, ‘so it appeared to him.’”
-Forgive: and if you must blame somebody, blame yourself—you can forgive
-yourself so easily.
-
-So we shall find sleep more restful if we leave behind us all the
-shortcomings of ourselves and of our fellows, and approach that season
-of seeming forgetfulness with love towards all. Calm as an infant’s
-sleep will be the slumber of the all-loving man, and for him the new
-day will dawn with increased brightness; his strength shall be renewed,
-and his joy be more abundant.
-
-If we always lie down to sleep with this attitude, regarding the
-darkness not merely as the time when the physical man should rest,
-but also as a growing time for the spiritual man, it will not be long
-before we adjust our daily life to more harmonious relations with the
-universe. The more lovingly we live, the sweeter and sounder will be
-our slumber, for so it is that “He giveth his beloved sleep.”
-
-
-
-
-CHAPTER VI
-
-SLEEP IS NATURAL
-
- Sleep is the joy of life.
-
- WU TING FANG.
-
-
-Man has not gone so far beyond the animal stage of development as
-to have cast aside all the weights that hinder him in his further
-progress. He has considered three substantial meals daily necessary to
-his health, and if, for any reason, his system refused to take that
-quantity of food, he has worried himself almost into a fever over it.
-Or, he has consulted a physician who has usually given him a tonic;
-a tonic is something to stimulate the jaded appetite, or compel the
-surfeited stomach to do more work than it should.
-
-Recent research has shown that this overworking of the digestive organs
-is a fruitful source of physical disease, that it dulls the mind and
-chills the spirit. Our loving Mother Nature punishes each excess,
-because pain quickest draws our attention to our wrongdoing. The flesh
-strives with us as well as the Spirit, for we reap in our own bodies
-the fruit of our ways; still man looks everywhere but within for
-advice and counsel. His feelings may warn him that he is pursuing the
-wrong course, but, until some authority has assured him that he is
-doing wrong, he rarely pays heed to his inner warnings.
-
-Gluttony is one of the evils which Nature tries to save man from. The
-stomach rebels when it is made to dispose of too much material, and
-calls in the rest of the body to assist in making a protest. The head
-aches, the heart works uneasily, the liver and bowels become inactive,
-the limbs grow heavy, and the whole abused man is ill at ease. A bad
-breath is worse than an evil spirit, and a bad digestion is a surer
-sign of ill-doing than a bad conscience. Nature has done her best to
-show the foolishness of overeating; it is not her fault if man persists
-in this course in spite of her warnings, but she takes care that he
-pays the price of his wrongdoing, sometimes in sleeplessness, often in
-even more serious ways.
-
-Overeating has been the fashion for centuries. We have thought that,
-the more we eat, the stronger we should become, and mankind has
-followed that fashion despite the ills that it has caused, forgetting
-that it is what we digest, not what we eat, that nourishes. The effects
-of overeating are both direct and indirect. The direct effects are
-those that dog the heels of the offense. These effects, when acute,
-have even caused death in a few hours or days, as with King John and
-his “dish of lamprey eels,” but some of the indirect effects are more
-direful. Much of the use of alcoholic liquors is due to overeating.
-When we have eaten too much, and the digestive organs are so overloaded
-that they cannot work, we take alcohol in some form to stimulate them
-to greater action. As we continue the wrong practice, it requires more
-and more liquor to stimulate us, usually ending in stupor, a parody of
-sleep. In a short time that which we used to cure or offset one evil
-has created a habit, in itself a greater evil.
-
-It took us a long time to see the connection between illness,
-drunkenness, and overeating. We now know that drink becomes a habit and
-after that a disease. If we look at mankind in the mass, drunkenness
-appears plainly as the result of two general causes, overstimulation of
-the indulgent classes, and the malnutrition that craves stimulants in
-the masses of the underfed.
-
-Like every other faculty, consciousness becomes dulled through lack
-of exercise. It follows that oversleeping inclines to dullness and
-stupidity. Further, the body will readily accommodate itself to the
-physiological conditions that prevail during sleep, to a changed blood
-circulation, and breathing. The oversleeping may come to resemble
-the hibernation of some animals. For those inclined to drowsiness or
-to unnaturally long sleep, real interests in life are helpful, also
-amusements, pleasant society in the evenings, and even tea and coffee
-or other mild stimulants are useful.
-
-Meanwhile, some people, at least, think they suffer from insomnia, who
-in fact suffer from going to bed too soon or lying abed too late—in the
-struggle to sleep more than they need.
-
-
-
-
-CHAPTER VII
-
-THE DUPLEX MIND
-
- Millions of spiritual creatures walk the earth
- Unseen, both when we wake and when we sleep.
-
- MILTON.
-
-
-We must not forget that it is easy to miss the good results of any
-natural function, and, through misuse, get only poor results. As in the
-matter of eating, we should get only good from satisfying our hunger,
-but the acquired habit of eating more than we need or can digest does
-incalculable harm. In the same way we may misuse sleep, and so lose its
-best benefits.
-
-“Sleep that knits up the raveled sleave of care,” may be made, as
-Shakespeare says, a repairing time as well as a resting time, for as
-Iamblichus, the Neo-Platonic philosopher saw, “The night-time of the
-body is the daytime of the soul.” With some insight into the best uses
-of this natural habit, Iamblichus further said that, during sleep,
-“the nobler part of the soul is united by abstraction to higher
-natures and becomes a participant in the wisdom and foreknowledge of
-the gods.” Dr. Thomas J. Hudson’s claim made a very popular appeal,
-that there is a subjective mind made up of our inner knowledge, our
-own intuitions and mental processes. He alleged it to be a part
-of our being that is able, in some instances—as in the case of
-“lightning calculators,” of mind-readers and of some clairvoyants—to
-perceive the relations of things without reasoning them out, and to
-perceive the fixed laws of Nature without the aid of the senses.[3] He
-concluded that this mind or this faculty of mind is an inheritance from
-experiences and conclusions of the race in its upward growth.
-
-[3] “Law of Psychic Phenomena,” chap. vi.
-
-Swedenborg also, who was at least a noted scientist, divided the mind
-into the Interior, corresponding to the subjective mind, and the
-Exterior or reasoning memory.[4]
-
-[4] Arcana Coelestia, § 1772.
-
-The objective mind, as it may be called, is what we all know as mind
-or intellect, that part which deals with external objects, getting
-its impressions and reaching its conclusions from observation. It is
-differently affected in different individuals by such purely physical
-things as sight and hearing. For a proof of this, ask any two persons
-who have seen and heard and been affected by something you have seen
-and felt, to describe its effect upon them, and the mental picture they
-have of it. Not only will they not agree in detail with each other,
-but you will find that neither has seen it in the same way that you
-have.
-
-Modern science cannot accept the statement that foreign, mysterious
-agencies control the mind during sleep; but may not some such
-experience as that which Iamblichus describes, come to us in sleep by
-the spirit working, not from without, but from within us? Our spiritual
-nature is freed at night from the incessant calls that beset us during
-the day. In the calm that comes over it in the night-time the doors of
-the storehouses of memory may stand wide open before it, and it may
-lead perhaps a broader, fuller life.
-
-Professor William James has shown that in our waking hours, each of us
-is not so much a single self as a cluster of separate selves—a business
-self, social self, the material self, and so on—all making up the man
-as his casual acquaintances know him. Professor James found that in
-every individual there is rivalry and sometimes discord among these
-partial selves. Now may it not be that in the silence, these warring
-factions lose their identity in a state of broader conscious life, and
-merge themselves into a harmoniously acting “Spiritual Me”?
-
-From the standpoint of this spiritual self, then, the waking state
-shows only the objective aspects of the mind. It is that understanding
-which shows us all men working, whether willingly or unwillingly, for
-the common good, and each receiving what he needs or has power to use.
-It is a recognition that all men are comprehended in the Spirit’s
-plan, that nothing can be for the common harm; that even mistakes work
-out for good, and that life gives to each the experience from which
-he will get most development and the power which he can best use and
-relate to his whole life. From the spiritual standpoint the subjective
-mind is the indwelling life of the soul; and its growth a matter of
-gradual self-attainment. At its highest stage it is the realization of
-that which we have in common with everyone—that understanding and that
-consciousness of the law of harmony which makes us love all mankind,
-and live in communion with the love that is the substance of all
-things. The separate self does not appear at all on the horizon of such
-thought and purpose.
-
-We have all had a consciousness of this love at some time in our lives,
-no matter how the cares of the world may have choked it out. It was
-this consciousness that made a little boy say, in a burst of happiness,
-“I love everything, and everything loves me.” When we “become like a
-little child” in this sense, we, too, recognize the love that binds all
-life in one.
-
-When we can harmonize these two—the subconscious, that knows no
-separate self, with the objective, that can see all men as one because
-it sees all men as working for the same end—we shall have rest and
-harmony instead of worry, the insanity of the spiritual mind.
-
-The objective mind which is active during waking hours, apparently
-rests during sleep; the subconscious mind is ever busy. Like the heart
-or the digestive organs, the subconscious mind carries on its work
-during that break in our usual consciousness which we call sleep. How
-this is done we do not know, any more than we know how the physical
-organs carry on their work while we are wrapped in slumber and
-unconscious of all about us. There are very few, though, who have not
-had some proof of the activity of the latent mind during sleep. That
-somehow this under-mind does work in an “uncanny” way—that is to say,
-in an unknown way—is shown by the fact that most persons can wake up at
-any hour that they fix in their minds without being called and without
-the abominable alarm clock.
-
-It is a common enough thing to hear people say, “I do not know how I
-knew that; I never remember hearing it; it just came to me.” Or, “I
-tried and tried to think of that yesterday, and could not, but, when
-I woke this morning, it was the first thing that came to my mind.”
-Such incidents show that some process of which we are not objectively
-conscious is going on all the time; that no mental experience is
-destroyed or wholly dissipated. The common wish is “to sleep over”
-any perplexing matter. After a good sleep our ideas are often better
-arranged than when we fell asleep.
-
-I have a friend who drops all her problems into her subconscious
-thought, refuses to be “exercised in her mind” about them, and leaves
-them for the latent mind to answer. So long as she views them from the
-objective, conscious point of view only, she finds herself worrying
-and losing sleep. The sleep-won mind, the “all-knowing Self,” as it
-were, is not touched by worry, perhaps because, in communion with
-the substance of all experience, it perceives that there are few
-“problems” in life, when she does not persist in regarding as a
-“problem” each separate experience.
-
-We must learn to connect each experience with what we know of our life
-up to that point and with what we think it is meant to be. This effort
-will often show us, or itself prove to be, the key to the “problem.”
-But it is only the scientific expert, one who has a perfect conception
-of the workings of all the parts of the frame, who can take one bone
-and reconstruct from it the entire structure of the extinct animal.
-That would be impossible for the tyro, and most of us are tyros in the
-science of living.
-
-
-
-
-CHAPTER VIII
-
-WAKEFULNESS
-
- And Sleep will not lie down but walks
- Wild-eyed and cries to time.
-
- “Ballad of Reading Gaol.” OSCAR WILDE.
-
-
-The fact that we confound rest and sleep makes us regard wakefulness as
-an evil. We go to bed to sleep, and, if sleep does not come at once,
-we begin to fret and to toss and we try by every means that we know
-to force ourselves to sleep. We never accomplish anything that way,
-because it is essentially opposed to the nature of sleep. Sleep, to be
-refreshing, must be complete relaxation of mind and body, and that is
-not gained by striving. Natural sleep is merely “letting go,” which is
-just what so many find hard to do. The course is so simple and plain
-that “the wayfaring man, though a fool, _need_ not err therein,” but
-he often does err in spite of its simplicity; and sometimes, perhaps,
-even because of its simplicity.
-
-Naaman, captain of the host of Syria, went to the Israelitish prophet,
-Elisha, to be cured of his leprosy. As he was a great man with his
-master, he expected some special ceremony done for him. Imagine his
-surprise and wrath when bidden to wash in the River Jordan.
-
-At first Naaman went away in a rage; such advice ill-befitted his ideas
-of his needs. If it were enough that he should bathe in a river, why
-in Jordan? “Are not Abana and Pharpar, rivers of Damascus, better
-than all the waters of Israel?” Why not wash in them and be clean? And
-Naaman turned and went away.
-
-But his servants questioned him and said: “Had the prophet bid thee do
-some great thing, wouldst thou not have done it? How much rather then
-when he saith to thee ‘wash and be clean’?” Then Naaman yielded and was
-made whole.
-
-This story is a picture of our own ways. We despise the remedy that is
-simple, and we feel sure that, had it been some great thing, we should
-have found it easier to do. We are unwilling to accept simple, natural
-explanations of our difficulties. We feel so because we think so
-highly of ourselves. We forget that the greatest things are often the
-simplest, and, if the natural things are too hard for us to do, it is
-because we lack that true greatness which sees and welcomes directness.
-
-If man understood his life better, he would cease to think of anything
-as an “accident” without a cause. He would know that nothing can occur
-to him that does not signify something to him in relation to his share
-in the plan of the Universe. He would understand that so simple a thing
-as whether or not he shall fall asleep as soon as he lies down to rest,
-or whether he shall find that “sleep has forsaken his eyes and slumber
-his eyelids,” may be an experience of great importance to him.
-
-Every incident of life is subject to law; yet many of the most
-important functions of the body are performed without any consciousness
-of their relation and dependence one upon another: as, for instance,
-breathing upon the circulation of the blood, which in turn depends
-upon the heart’s pumping, and that upon the digestion, and that upon
-the food, and so on; the same is true of mental activities, and must
-be true of spiritual activities, for the same law runs through all of
-life. The wakefulness surely has some cause and some significance, else
-it had not been.
-
-When something “goes wrong,” we are forced to look into our case, and
-note the relation of one state of mind or body to other states. It is
-then, if ever, that we learn which is cause and which is effect; how
-mistakes result in pain and pain warns us of mistakes, and how one
-necessarily follows the other. If it were not for the pain that follows
-the violation of some natural law, man might go on in his unwise course
-until he had altogether destroyed his physical body.
-
-It is the pain from the burn on the tiny hand that warns the infant
-not again to touch what he is told is “hot.” If fire did not pain the
-body, we might be destroyed by flames without making any effort to
-escape. In fact, the chilliness and numbness of the African “sleeping
-sickness” often lead patients actually to burn off their hands or feet
-in the effort to get warm. It is quite possible that, if there were no
-pains in child-birth, women would bear children continually until they
-were themselves exhausted or their progeny overran one another. It is
-pain that tells us that a tooth is decayed, so that even toothache may
-be a blessing.
-
-Therefore, if we are wise, instead of rebelling against pain, we should
-accept it gratefully as the helper and the possible preserver of our
-lives, and we should accept the wakefulness quietly as the sign of
-something that needs correction, or else as an opportunity for quiet
-thought and reflection.
-
-When we have found what is wrong, and do our best to correct it, not
-only is the attention drawn from the pain to the remedy, but the effort
-to relieve it lessens the effect of the suffering.[5]
-
-[5] Tolstoy has traced out the working of that curious and benign
-dispensation. See chap. xvii, “Life and Love and Peace,” where the
-present author has fully considered his views.
-
-
-
-
-CHAPTER IX
-
-SIMPLE CAUSES OF WAKEFULNESS
-
- Where care lodges, sleep will never lie.
-
- SHAKESPEARE.
-
-
-We all know the blessing of sleep, but it is hard to show the sufferer
-that wakefulness is useful.
-
-Wakefulness always has some cause, and, if we truly wish to be cured
-of it, it will be well to seek the cause rather than to grumble at the
-wakefulness itself. It is not enough to know what is the matter, we
-must find out why it is the matter. To find the cause of any condition
-simplifies matters; it makes the course we must follow clearer. If the
-cause can be removed, we should bend all our energies to removing it;
-to paraphrase Stephen Pearl Andrews’ saying—we are not to be subject
-to circumstances, but rather to make ourselves center-stances. But,
-if the matter be something over which we have no control, there are
-two courses open to us: the first is to accept the condition and adapt
-ourselves to it; the second is to devise some method by which we may
-gain control over it.
-
-A childish story[6] will illustrate this:
-
-[6] Republished by permission of the Century Company.
-
- Once there was a squirrel that did not like its home, and it used to
- scold and find fault with everything. Its papa squirrel had long gray
- whiskers, so he was wise. He said to the squirrel: “My dear, as you
- do not like your home, there are three sensible things you could do:
-
- Leave it,
- or Change it,
- or Suit yourself to it.
-
- Any one of these would help you in your trouble.” But the little
- squirrel said, “Oh! I do not want to do any of those; I had rather
- sit on the branch of a tree and scold.” “Well,” said the papa
- squirrel, “if you must do that, whenever you want to scold, just go
- out on a branch and scold away at someone you do not know.” The little
- squirrel blushed so much that he became a red squirrel, and you will
- notice that to this day red squirrels do just that thing.
-
-Whatever course we pursue, we find something to do in connection with
-the underlying principle or cause; this _doing_ prevents us from
-wasting energy and patience upon mere effects. That is an advantage,
-for any action relieves mental pain, and often relieves physical pain,
-too. The victim writhes not only in its effort to escape, but in the
-effort to express its feeling, to respond to the excited nerves, just
-as we dance about or hop up and down when we hit our finger with the
-hammer. We often hear people deplore that their suffering is increased
-because they can do nothing to remedy the trouble. We frequently
-exclaim, “It would be easier to bear, if only I could _do_ something.”
-A knowledge of what to do and how to do it always helps toward peace of
-mind.
-
-When yellow fever was one of the “mysterious dispensations of
-Providence,” men of science fought only its symptoms, with very
-indifferent success. The people in the district where the fever broke
-out were panic-stricken; those who could fled from the place; those
-who were compelled to remain went about in fear of their lives. Now
-that we believe that the bite of an infected mosquito is the once
-“mysterious dispensation,” we no longer allow the infection to spread.
-Fear and unreason might have continued to treat outbreaks and epidemics
-of yellow fever for centuries to come without lasting advantage to the
-plague-ridden spots, but the knowledge of what to do and how to do it
-has made yellow fever a preventable evil. It has no terrors for an
-intelligent community.
-
-So with wakefulness. If we find ourselves wakeful when we should be
-sleeping, the first thing to do is to find the reason.
-
-Sometimes we cause our own sleeplessness unsuspectingly, but none
-the less deliberately, by the false requirements that we lay upon
-ourselves. People often say, “I could not go to sleep in a room like
-that.” If there is time and opportunity to put the room in order, why
-do it; but, if not, we can resolve, as the boys say, to “forget it.”
-Many a woman frets and disturbs herself continually by putting things
-in what she considers order, which things are no better for being
-rearranged and which generally cannot stay in order—endless pushing
-in of chairs and placing pamphlets or books with the little ones on
-top and the big ones at the bottom; a constant and wearisome struggle
-to keep all the shades in the house in a line. The labor of Sisyphus,
-who had forever to roll a great stone up a sand hill, would be restful
-compared with that. I knew a man once who would be entirely upset, and
-would upset all the people about him, if his stockings that came from
-the wash were not placed below those in the drawer so that they would
-surely be used in rotation.
-
-Some persons cannot sleep after dawn if the light shines on their
-faces, yet are so possessed by the idea of order that they will not
-move the bed, disarrange the furniture to make a screen, or even sleep
-with their heads at the foot of the bed.
-
-Another person insists always on being waked up by the last person to
-come home in order to be sure that the house was closed up. Still
-another cannot go to sleep till he has balanced up every cent of petty
-cash spent that day.
-
-Many persons spend the most of their thought and exhaust themselves
-over things that are just as trivial and inconsequent as these; though
-they seem important to them. When anything has become such a habit,
-even though reasonable in itself, that you cannot sleep without it, you
-are paying too dear for it and it is time to change it. There is danger
-even in good habits—they may master us.
-
-It may be that we have had some stimulating mental experience which
-has not yet relaxed its grip upon our attention. In such case even
-bodily weariness is apt to be forgotten, for, after all, every physical
-sensation is dependent upon some mental condition, whether fleeting or
-permanent. It is this interdependence of physical feeling and thought
-which makes it possible to recall emotions of pain or sorrow, of
-comfort or joy. The sight, the touch, or the smell of certain things
-will bring back sensations that once accompanied them, whether those
-sensations be painful or pleasant.
-
-If the mind has been so stimulated that it cannot relax, there is
-little likelihood that sleep will come quickly, but we cannot relax by
-impatience. Tossing and turning will not quiet the mind; we must either
-accept the condition calmly and follow out the train of thought that
-has started or deliberately side-track the exciting cause. This may be
-done by setting up a counter activity in the mind along quieting lines.
-For instance, if one had walked the streets late on some such occasion
-as a New Year’s Eve celebration in New York, and had become stimulated
-by the lights and the crowds, he might deliberately recall the most
-peaceful day in the country that it had been his fortune ever to know.
-
-A typical scene of this sort is a warm Sunday in late spring, when
-all the usual activities of country life have ceased; the air is
-heavy with the scent of clover and field flowers, the apple blossoms,
-and the thousand odors of the fresh country field; the air moving so
-lazily that it scarcely stirs the trees; the cow chewing the meditative
-cud; the bees buzzing dreamily; the very horses, standing under the
-shed of the little white country church, whinnying softly to each
-other, as knowing that a spell of peace is over all, a spell that must
-not be broken; while from the church itself comes the drone of the
-preacher,—each little stir a part of the peace that broods over the
-day. Think of some such thing as that, recall it in all its details,
-and the chances are that the drowsiness induced at the time, whether
-one were of the congregation or a mere onlooker, will again steal over
-the eyelids and, before one is aware of any change, he is well on the
-way to the land of dreams.
-
-In the same way if one has read an exciting book, or has seen a
-thrilling play, one may either live them over until the feelings
-exhaust themselves, because no longer new, or one may deliberately
-divert one’s self from thinking of them and devote the attention to
-more soothing things. Either course removes all cause for impatience
-with the fact of wakefulness and leaves the mind quieted. This tends to
-drowsiness, even if it does not really induce sleep.
-
-Sometimes it may help us if we rise and read some quieting book, not
-“a thriller.” Such a volume as Thoreau’s “Walden,” or that more modern
-little volume, “Adventures in Contentment,” by David Grayson, or we
-may repeat some soothing poem like Tennyson’s “Sweet and Low,” or
-Burroughs’ “My Own Shall Come to Me” and similar verses.
-
-Any of these will help to relax tension, and put us in a more restful
-frame of mind, and, as minds differ, so some persons will find books
-and verses of other sorts to have the desired effect upon them.
-
-When we cannot sleep, to rise, throw back the bed-clothes so as to cool
-the bed, walk about the room, go to the window and fill the lungs with
-oxygen often tend to quiet the body and mind. We must learn to know our
-own needs and to find out each for himself what meets them. To “know
-thyself” is only the first step to control thyself.
-
-
-
-
-CHAPTER X
-
-“LIGHT” SLEEPERS
-
- He sleeps well who knows not that he sleeps ill.
-
- PUBLIUS SYRUS (42 B.C.).
-
-
-Someone may say that such things as stimulation of the mind are simple
-causes of wakefulness, and so easily overcome that it is hardly
-necessary to consider them; yet, simple as they are, they frequently
-make the wakeful one impatient. The more complex causes are really as
-easily dealt with as these simple ones, when once we have learned to
-control the mind. Take, for instance, the complaining “light sleeper”
-who cannot sleep if anybody else makes a noise, or if anything out
-of the ordinary occurs. He is in a steady state of apprehension lest
-something will happen to disturb his rest; and generally something does
-happen. A baby cries, a dog barks, a heavily-laden team lumbers by,
-an automobile honks, a locomotive shrieks, or a steamer whistles, and
-sleep forsakes him for the night.
-
-He pronounces anathema on the offending cause; he pities himself for
-his sensitiveness, at the same time that he almost despises his
-fellows who are so “dead and unresponsive that they can sleep through
-such a racket” he suffers at the thought that he may get no more sleep,
-yet he enjoys the prospect of rehearsing to a sympathizing audience in
-the morning the tortures of such a delicate organization as his. This
-sort of sleeplessness is made up of so many contributing causes that
-it is difficult for any but the most perfectly honest man to decide
-what makes him so susceptible to noise. But it is undoubtedly true that
-some of these causes are due to fear, to training, and, most of all, to
-self-interest.
-
-It is always difficult to make the super-sensitive person realize
-that his suffering is due chiefly to self-consideration and a desire
-to control others. It is an undue recognition of one’s own claim upon
-the very circumstances of life that makes one offer so many surfaces
-which may be “hurt.” We may be disturbed in our sleep by the ordinary
-pursuits of our fellows because we have an exaggerated idea of the
-importance of certain conditions that appeal to us and make for our
-comfort. We wish to sleep at a certain time, and we should like to
-regulate all our neighbors so that they, too, should suspend all
-activities at that same time. We accustom ourselves to quiet; and then
-insist that we cannot do without it.
-
-There is a story told of a man working in a foundry who formed a part
-of two “shifts” of workmen and betweenwhiles slept for some hours in
-the foundry. When released from that strain, he found that he could not
-sleep at home because it was so quiet, and it became necessary for the
-members of his family to unite in making ringing, pounding noises to
-lull him to slumber.
-
-It is a well-known fact that those who live near the cataracts of
-the Nile cannot sleep if they get beyond the sound of the pounding.
-Soldiers, who are wearied after a hard day’s march or fighting, will
-sleep soundly beside twenty-four pounder guns steadily firing; or even
-sleep on the march, their legs moving mechanically though their senses
-are steeped in sleep.
-
-Country people coming to the city are kept awake by the unusual street
-noises, while city-dwellers, accustomed to the roar of elevated or
-subway trains, are unable to sleep in the country because of the
-intense silence which Nature’s noises often emphasize.
-
-Unreflecting man is a creature of habit: if any change occurs in his
-routine, he finds it difficult to adapt himself to it. He seldom comes
-to understand that it is chiefly insistence upon his own needs as apart
-from the needs or interests of others that makes him require certain
-conditions for sleeping. In either case the cause of wakefulness is
-easily found; but nobody other than the individual most concerned can
-remove it.
-
-If we are living in selfish disharmony with our fellows; if we are
-indulging feelings of envy, malice, uncharitableness or hatred towards
-those about us, we are not likely to sleep refreshingly. All such
-emotions do more harm to the one who feels them than to those against
-whom they are directed. They may undermine the health, destroy the
-mental poise, and blot out the sense of kinship with mankind. The
-Hebrews understood that so well that he who would offer a sacrifice is
-reminded that, if he have aught against his brother, he must leave his
-gift at the altar and make his peace before he can offer an acceptable
-sacrifice to God.
-
-If wakefulness be the result of impatience with our brother, there is
-only one cure for it: that is, to replace it with loving patience. It
-is the lack of love, or the possession of very narrow love, that causes
-us pain in our relations with other people.
-
-
-
-
-CHAPTER XI
-
-THE GIFTS OF WAKEFULNESS
-
-
-“But,” you say, “I am not full of uncharitableness towards my fellows
-and I am willing they should live their own lives; I am greatly worried
-about my own affairs and all my cares come trooping back to me as
-soon as I lie down. I cannot sleep for worry.” Yes; but is not that
-only another form of selfishness? A subtle form, but none the less
-disturbing. Moreover, it is shortsighted, as is all selfishness, for it
-is a boomerang. If the worry is about business, we shall need a clear
-brain and a steady nerve to face the condition that is causing the
-uneasiness; and worry at night will not give us these. On the contrary,
-it will destroy what remnant of poise we may have.
-
-The solution of trouble is not found in worry. Just recall how often
-you have said yourself, or heard somebody say, “After all my worrying
-it came out all right; it is strange that I never once thought of that
-way.” Worry prevents clear thinking, or, indeed, thinking of any sort.
-We go around and around in a circle until we grow giddy and faint
-with apprehension, while all the time we might have peace if we but
-looked at life aright, to see that, in the words of the old Book,
-“it is all very good.” When a mechanic is putting a machine together
-and finds that the parts do not fit, that they do not “go right” or
-harmonize, he will reach one of two conclusions. Either the maker did
-not know his business, and so did not make the parts to fit, or else
-he, himself, is putting them together in the wrong way. If he wants
-to put that machine together so that it will work well, he will look
-into the matter carefully, examining each part, all the time keeping in
-his mind a conception of the complete machine. He will probably find
-that he has been trying to fit two unrelated parts together, or has
-reversed their position, misunderstood or only partially understood
-their uses, or has done something through carelessness that may easily
-be corrected. Of course, if he is a stupid or foolish workman, and not
-a skilled mechanic, he may persist in his wrong course and fail to get
-the machine into working order. But that is not the fault of the maker,
-nor does it prove that the machine would not do perfect work if it were
-rightly understood and intelligently controlled. So it is with the
-Cosmos, the orderly world, which will go right for us if we do our part
-right.
-
-The first step towards knowing how to get anything is to have a clear
-idea of what it is that we want; for development is not thrust upon us,
-nor dropped upon us by our parents. It is desire that creates function;
-the creature that wants to swim is the creature that learns to swim;
-the bird that does not want to fly will lose the power; before we can
-rise higher, we must look higher.
-
-“When the ideal once alights in our streets,” says Edward Carpenter,
-“we may go home to supper in peace, the rest will be seen to.” But,
-if we enjoy worry as the countryman’s wife “enjoys poor health,” we
-shall continue to have it, for we always get what we most want, if we
-set about it in the right way. And if we do not want worry, we need
-not worry. If the trouble is unavoidable or unchangeable, it were wise
-to use our powers to adjust ourselves to the inevitable. If it be a
-curable trouble, the only thing is to discover or devise a cure. As
-soon as we start to work we cease to worry, because worry and effective
-activity cannot exist at the same time. Man, at least, is such a
-creature that any real action looking towards a definite end brings him
-pleasure; and, though the action may have been stimulated by pain, yet
-the pleasure he finds in the action mitigates, if it does not destroy,
-the pain.
-
-If the original cause for the worry lies in our own ignorance,
-selfishness, or thoughtlessness, the anxiety may teach us to repair the
-ill so that we may not have to get the same lesson again. But worrying
-will teach us less than a cheerful acceptance of the facts—or than that
-courage which says,
-
- “And still the menace of the years
- Finds and shall find me unafraid”—
-
-and one of the best aids to cheerfulness is sound, refreshing sleep. If
-we should put off all worrying until the morning, there would be very
-little worrying done by the normal, healthy person, for, after a good
-night’s sleep and in the clear light of day, things look much better
-than they did in the darkness and solitude of the night, with mind and
-body worn from the activities of the day.
-
-If we feel that our affairs are too important to be left to the care of
-the Providence that keepeth Israel, and slumbers not nor sleeps, then
-at least we may wait until morning to give our attention to them. It is
-unfair to bring exhausted faculties to bear upon matters of so great
-weight. If our troubles can be helped by worrying, we should worry when
-we are in the best possible trim. To do less were to underestimate
-their importance and to prove that, anyway, they are not worth losing
-sleep over.
-
-But there is still another way of looking at wakefulness, when we
-cannot trace the cause of it. It may be the time sent to us by the
-Spirit for quiet thought. The ancients believed that God spoke in
-visions of the night. We may not always be able to sleep, but we can
-always lie in the arms of our Great Mother Nature. There is a real
-philosophy as well as devotion in the old prayer we teach our children,
-“Now I lay me down to sleep.” A still older form of the almost
-instinctive recognition of the fact that sleeping is but intrusting
-ourselves to the Universal love was, “He committed himself to God in
-sleep.” Like sleep, a wakeful night may be a growing time. It affords
-the quiet, the time, the seclusion to think over the meanings of
-things, or even to seek the cause of the wakefulness itself. For that
-is the first thing to do if we find ourselves wakeful; if the cause
-be so obscure that we cannot find it, then the best thing to do is to
-accept the fact.
-
-Either we do not need the sleep we are seeking,—the reclining position
-being all the _rest_ the body needs,—or else we do need the wakefulness
-to teach us something that we can learn or will learn in no other way.
-It is a time when, free from the watchful eyes of those who love us, or
-those who do not love us, we need not fear to look at ourselves, our
-motives, our relations to our fellows.
-
-It may be only at such a time that we can feel the closeness of the
-tie that binds all mankind, only in such a time that a life-giving
-sense of oneness can renew life and joy. Some persons are so acutely
-conscious of the surge around them during the day that it is difficult,
-if not impossible, for them to get any large view of it. They are so
-beset and bewildered by each little detail of life that they cannot
-see any relation among things as a whole, cannot “see the wood for
-the trees.” Or, it may be that a lack of poise, a false estimate of
-the relations of things, makes them find “their own affairs” so
-interesting or exhausting that the observing mind gets no large or deep
-impressions to be added to the sum of the knowledge the inner self
-possesses.
-
-For either of these classes the wakeful night may prove more restful
-and helpful than hours of sleep. It may be made to bring a breadth of
-view that will lift one out of the narrow limits in which daily life is
-passed. It may do as much as this for any of us, and, if we reject the
-receptive mood, and insist upon objecting to the wakefulness, we may
-thereby deprive ourselves of some of the most illuminating experiences.
-
-Someone has said: “Sleep, like drink, may drown our sorrows, yet
-it also drowns our joys. What could we not accomplish if we did not
-require sleep?” It may be comforting to think of this when we are lying
-awake, that at least we are wasting no time. The gift of wakefulness
-is often as desirable as is the gift of sleep, and, if we welcome the
-one as what must be—with as much cheerfulness as the other—each will
-bring us equal blessings. It often happens that what we regard as evil
-is but Life’s left hand outstretched with a gift whose use we did not
-recognize when presented by her right hand.
-
-
-
-
-CHAPTER XII
-
-THE PURPOSE OF SLEEP
-
- Sleep is a life giver as well as a life saver.
-
- WILLARD MOYER.
-
-
-But none of these things lessens the benefits of real sleep, nor are
-they intended to show that sleep is unnecessary, for although it may be
-true, as Dr. Charles Brodie Patterson says in “The New Heaven and the
-New Earth,” that man will some day get along without sleep, no one is
-yet able to do that.
-
-Although our troubles make us lose sleep, we could lose all or nearly
-all our troubles if we got natural sleep. Forgetfulness of daily frets,
-of the wear and tear of contact with the sharp edges of our own temper
-and the temper of others—these are the things that sleep blots out.
-“Go to sleep,” says Mother Nature, “and forget your troubles.” And
-to blot them out even for a time means surcease of sorrow and worry
-for that time at least, and a new way of looking at them when we have
-awakened. That is what sleep is for. It is the use of it.
-
-Pat took Mike to church for the first time, and, when the ceremony was
-over, he said, “Well, Mike, what do you think uv it?” “Think uv it,
-Pat? The candles, the bowings, the incinse, and the garmints,—it do
-bate the divil.”
-
-“Sure,” replied Pat, “thot’s the intintion.” And so it is the
-intention of sleep to “beat the devil” of unrest and dissatisfaction.
-Nothing makes us feel better than a good night’s sleep. It soothes the
-aching muscles, quiets the jangling nerves, brushes away the cobwebs of
-the mind, and leaves us rested and refreshed, strong to meet the events
-of the new day.
-
-It is after a bad night that we rise oppressed with fear for what the
-day may bring us; overwhelmed in advance with shadowings of evil. This,
-in itself, makes us unequal to the demands of the day. If any seeming
-strain is put upon us that day, we are apt to make errors in meeting
-it; if we find anyone has failed to do just what seemed to us best, we
-upbraid him roundly and unlovingly, making him and ourselves unhappy.
-
-At the close of such a spoiled day, when we review its happenings, we
-say: “I knew this morning that this would be an unlucky day. I felt it
-as soon as I got up.” But we may not realize that that very attitude
-of fear and apprehension may have caused all that we call ill-luck.
-Remember this, then, lest the one bad day should spoil another night.
-
-Often after a night of sound, wholesome, refreshing sleep we are
-surprised to find that what looked like a mountain at midnight is now
-scarcely a hillock. We find that we can see around it on all sides,
-and the prospect of surmounting that difficulty fills us with peculiar
-delight. We are no longer apprehensive of anything. The things we see
-in our work in the world are no more terrible than what we see in that
-unknown world which we enter nightly through the gate of sleep. We
-long to pass that gate, yet we know nothing of where we go, how far we
-travel, or by what means we come back.
-
-If we can trust Life for what the night brings, we can trust it further
-and gladly accept what the day brings. We feel this, even if we are not
-conscious of it, and after a good sleep (this is what sleep is for), we
-accept it much as the child accepts his mother’s care.
-
-A little boy was riding in a trolley car with his parents and persisted
-in standing up, to the terror of his mother, who begged him to sit down
-lest he get hurt.
-
-Turning to his father he whispered, as he reluctantly took his seat,
-“What a ’fraid-cat mother is.” “Oh, well!” replied his father,
-“she is nervous, but you know she has to take care of her little boy.”
-“Yes,” said the child, “that’s what she is for.” So that is what
-sleep is for—to take care of us, but we cannot compel sleep; and the
-advantage of recognizing the possible gifts of wakefulness is that we
-thus get around to the frame of mind where we drop into natural sleep.
-Impatience not only delays the coming of sleep, but it robs us of any
-benefit we might receive from lying peacefully in the dark.
-
-
-
-
-CHAPTER XIII
-
-THE SLEEP OF THE INVALID
-
- Sleep, O gentle Sleep,
- Nature’s soft nurse—
-
- SHAKESPEARE.
-
-
-We should not think that, because we are ill, it is natural that we
-should not sleep. The invalid needs more and better sleep than the
-robust person—and the invalid can have it.
-
-It is true that, as more and better sleep comes, the invalid will
-cease to be an invalid—at least that is the beginning of the end of
-invalidism. For Nature provides sleep as the “balm of hurt minds” —a
-cure for body or mind that needs restoring.
-
-In the case of severe illness the physician in charge feels relieved
-when he learns that his patient is sleeping well. The professional
-idea of sleep is that nutrition goes on most perfectly during sleeping
-hours; that is, that Nature repairs all the waste that results from the
-use of brain and muscle during our waking hours. The more prolonged and
-undisturbed the sleep is, the more opportunity Nature has to make good
-the extra demands made upon the system by disease. It opens the way
-for the “Vis Medicatrix Naturæ”—the healing power of Life.
-
-Take, for example, the fever patient. Anyone who has watched beside a
-loved one slowly consuming, with the fever raging in his blood, will
-remember the sigh of relief that has gone up from physician and nurse
-when the patient falls into a natural sleep after the turn of things.
-During dreadful nights and anxious days we wait breathlessly for the
-“crisis”; we hang upon the physician’s word, scan his face for every
-fleeting expression, because we may be deceived by the disease, but his
-practiced eye should know. But we do not need his assurance when the
-moaning and restlessness pass, when the stertorous breathing quiets,
-when the skin becomes moist, and the gentle, regular breathing tells us
-that natural sleep has come. If we can be spared, we go out under the
-stars and, whether Christian or pagan, up from the depths of our souls
-wells a prayer of thankfulness to “whatever gods there be” for the
-incomparable blessing of sleep. We feel as if we could “go softly all
-our days” before the powers who have decreed that sleep shall gently
-steep the eyelids of the one we love.
-
-Nourishment, in the form of food, is desirable, but more important
-still is the sleep when Nature busies herself building new tissue and
-blood to make good the ravages of fever’s siege. We are careful to
-keep even good news from the patient, if we have cause to fear that
-it will prove too stimulating, and everything depressing or alarming
-is absolutely withheld, because sleep is the paramount need of the
-depleted body.
-
-We all recognize the value of sleep to the person just past the crisis
-of a severe illness, and the next thing to learn is that to the person
-invalided through some less active cause, it is as necessary, and that
-it may be had.
-
-It may seem an extravagant statement to say that the invalid should
-be able to summon sleep at will even better than an active, healthy
-person. But we may see the truth of this statement if we accept Dr.
-Edward Binns’ assurance that “in no sense can fatigue be said to be
-the cause of sleep,” so that the usual claim that the sick do not get
-an opportunity to weary themselves, and so cannot expect sound sleep,
-cannot be accounted a reason for sleeplessness of the invalid.
-
-To be sure, lying abed is not always restful. A friend of mine was
-kept in bed for some weeks by a broken ankle. It was necessary to
-remain in the one position day and night, which so wore upon her
-nervous organization that she grew restless and “lost” much sleep. In
-this condition, she said the hardest thing to bear was the well-meant
-congratulations of her friends that at least she was “getting a
-much-needed rest.” But the real reason why an invalid should learn to
-sleep at will is because sleep alone can do what Macbeth asks of the
-physician:
-
- “Canst thou not minister to a mind diseased,
- Pluck from the memory a rooted sorrow,
- Raze out the written troubles of the brain,
- And with some sweet oblivious antidote
- Cleanse the stuff’d bosom of that perilous stuff
- Which weighs upon the heart?”
-
-Yes, sleep can do this; and illness has need of just such comfort. The
-enforced idleness leads to much reflection and the nervous system is
-then ill-adapted to endure emotional strain. If pain be added there is
-still greater need for sleep. Nor is pain absolutely hostile to sleep:
-the writer can often go to sleep while the dentist is drilling and
-filling his teeth, and Dr. J. Howard Reed says that this is not very
-uncommon.
-
-Pain is Nature’s strong protest against overstimulation or overexertion
-and the exhaustion which it occasions is itself conducive to sleep. It
-would be better for us to heed that protest and use our intelligence to
-secure sound, refreshing sleep, that Nature might perfect her cures.
-
-
-
-
-CHAPTER XIV
-
-THE SLEEPLESSNESS OF PAIN
-
- He kisses brows that ache from earthly care;
- He soothes to peace the indignant souls of slaves.
-
- EDGAR FAWCETT.
-
-
-Sometimes we are kept awake by pain. Some persons suffer pain that has
-no remission, except the temporary deadness that comes from nervous
-exhaustion—and sleep.
-
-But sometimes the hardest torture is the thought that the pain is
-unnecessary or useless. I went once to visit a friend, whom I found
-suffering from the worst abscesses on the back of the neck that I ever
-saw, so frightful that the sight of them made me, who am a strong man,
-feel faint. I asked sympathetically what was the matter. “Oh,” he
-said, “I’m getting some experience.” That consciousness that such pain
-was useful helped to make the agony less unendurable. In fact, though
-he did not see it all then, he was getting just what he and those about
-him needed. He was a vigorous man, who took to rural work in a place
-where the food was excellent; he was naturally gluttonous and overate,
-hence the boils. This he learned; and also how to bear pain.
-
-There are ways of bearing pain more easily. We must consider the pain
-philosophically, and treat it from all three sides—the bodily, the
-intellectual, and the spiritual.
-
-However advanced we may be, it is foolish to deny that, in common with
-the rest of mankind, we are more or less in what Paul called the bonds
-of the flesh. To try to treat an aching tooth without physical means
-is like trying to grow a new leg instead of getting an artificial one.
-There was a stage in man’s Pre-Adamite progress from the amœba when,
-like the crab, he could grow new legs. Possibly, by discarding all
-other faculties, men might again be able to grow new legs: but it would
-not pay.
-
-A man who makes hammers may at one time have made his own files, had a
-shop for that. But, as trades became specialized, he found it better
-and cheaper to buy his files. Perhaps the supply is suddenly cut off.
-Now he could reassemble from the scrap-heap the file machinery and make
-files again, but it would be at the cost of putting so much time and
-energy into that branch as to paralyze the hammer factory.
-
-So, Nature found that men rarely lost their legs and that it was more
-economical to divert the organization and the energy that reproduced
-legs into the brain, which enables men to supply themselves and their
-fellows, when occasion arises, with artificial legs. Accordingly we
-have lost much of the power of automatic self-healing and have gained
-much power of deliberate self-healing.
-
-While distrusting crutches and drugs, therefore, because we see the
-immediate effect of them, but cannot know the remote effects of them,
-we cannot refuse a hot-water bottle or an anæsthetic when the pain,
-the symptom of the disorder, becomes dangerous in itself. The fever
-of typhoid represents a battle within which must be fought out to a
-conclusion—successful or not. But, when the patient is in danger of
-dying from the high temperature, it is no inconsistency for a mental or
-spiritual healer to cool the room or sponge the patient with alcohol.
-
-Before we resort to the dentist for the aching tooth, we may reduce the
-inflammation by abstaining from food and starving the blood corpuscles,
-which hasten to the diseased part, until, perhaps, they feed upon
-the weaker and obnoxious tissues. This abstinence will go far toward
-removing the restlessness that is so torturing an accompaniment of the
-pain. These are the physical remedies.
-
-The mental ones consist mainly in trying to isolate the aching member,
-to realize that it is the tooth, not you, that aches, and to watch it
-as if it were a separate person. A little boy was asked how he felt
-after a feast of green apples. “I have a pain in the middle of my
-stomach,” he said, “but the rest of me feels fine.” A further mental
-remedy is to send to that separated part, the nerve, the assurance
-that you have already its message, which is that there is inflammation
-in the tooth and that you will attend to it as speedily as possible.
-The nerve gets tired, as it were, of repeating a message that gets no
-attention just as it gets tired of reporting the ticking of a clock so
-that we become unconscious of it; although, if we suspected that it was
-the knocking of a burglar’s tool, we should be kept awake by it night
-after night.
-
-And we must not complain. The Japanese think it rude to complain. If
-you are miserable, why make others miserable, too? Better not even let
-it be known, if you can help it without creating unpleasantness, that
-you suffer. To solicit sympathy is weakening and the constant inquiry,
-“How are you now?” concentrates your attention on yourself and on your
-feelings. If we complained to everyone of the ticking clock, we would
-never forget it; it would become less and less endurable.
-
-The spiritual treatment is harder to make clear. It is the
-unwillingness to have pain that makes it hard to bear. To illustrate
-again from the dentist, because that experience is still common
-to nearly everyone: We go to the operating chair, not gladly, but
-willingly, believing that it is wise and necessary and we bear
-the pain without complaining, knowing that it is the common lot of
-man. But suppose you were seized, strapped into the chair, and then
-your teeth were drilled and sawed to no good purpose, how much more
-frightful would be the pain. That would be because you believed it to
-be unnecessary and useless. It would be quite different if you trusted
-the operator. We must realize, then, that, if there is a controlling
-and benevolent Power in the Universe, which we all, rightly or wrongly,
-believe in our hearts, we never can have any pain that is useless or
-needless to ourselves, or to others, our other selves.
-
-We may not see it at the time, but, if we look for it, we usually shall
-see it. While writing this the author was attacked with a violent
-toothache: he had exercised ordinary prudence in attending to his
-teeth, so that it did not seem as if the pain were needed to teach
-care. But when the toothache came he remembered that, seldom having
-pain himself, that subject had been overlooked among the many chapters
-of the book. That was a reason; but, notwithstanding the efforts of an
-excellent dentist, the torture continued. Why?
-
-Why, that he might try these things; and he did practice them so as to
-lose no sleep. In addition he concluded that it was needful just then
-that he should feel just such pain in order to revive his sympathy and
-patience with those whose harassed nerves account for so much of their
-unreasonableness.
-
-With that sense, that one is in a manner suffering for men, comes
-something of the exaltation of the martyr, even with prosaic toothache.
-With that certainly disappears all impatience with the pain.
-
-Perhaps he will be accounted superstitious in adding that, when these
-lessons were learned, the dentist found the trouble and the pain melted
-away. But he has had exactly similar experiences before: a new lesson
-or a renewal of it was needed. When the pain was no longer necessary it
-ceased. Why should it continue?
-
-
-SWEET AND LOW
-
- Sweet and low, sweet and low,
- Wind of the western sea;
- Low, low, breathe and blow,
- Wind of the western sea!
- Over the rolling waters go,
- Come from the dying moon, and blow,
- Blow him again to me;
- While my little one,
- While my pretty one,
- Sleeps.
-
- Sleep and rest, sleep and rest;
- Father will come to thee soon.
- Rest, rest on Mother’s breast;
- Father will come to thee soon.
- Father will come to his babe in the nest,—
- Silver sails all out of the west
- Under the silver moon!
- Sleep, my little one;
- Sleep my pretty one,
- Sleep.
-
- TENNYSON.
-
-
-
-
-CHAPTER XV
-
-OPIATES
-
-
-One of the most common signs of something at fault either with the body
-or the mind is headache. Now headache, like wakefulness or nervousness,
-so often associated with headache, is an effect of some error, not a
-cause of it, and the wise sufferer will seek the cause even before he
-treats the effect.
-
-We call ourselves the most enlightened nation of the earth to-day, and
-it is true that a little knowledge has been more generally diffused
-among our people than among other peoples of the world. But we should
-not forget that “a little knowledge is a dangerous thing” largely
-because a little knowledge frequently proves to be no real knowledge at
-all. For example, the “little knowledge” generally possessed in regard
-to opiates.
-
-Coal-tar was once a waste product, but toward the end of the last
-century a German chemist discovered that from it could be derived a
-drug, acetanilid, which would greatly lower temperature in fever.
-This discovery was hailed as a boon to humanity, and many other
-by-products of coal-tar were soon placed on the market, and regarded as
-of equal value with acetanilid. Physicians used them for a time without
-questioning, and the people took to them gladly. Wherever there was a
-persistent headache, some one of the coal-tar products was used, and
-“headache powders” multiplied.
-
-But a little further knowledge led physicians to question the
-expediency of using acetanilid, phenacetin, antipyrin, or any of the
-coal-tar preparations in other than exceptional cases. Heart-failure
-and other dangerous results so frequently followed their use that
-the wisdom of using them at all became doubtful. As our knowledge
-increases, we are likely to find both the wisdom and necessity entirely
-disappearing.
-
-In the meantime, those who have heard that temporary relief from pain
-may be had by using these drugs will go on using them, often in patent
-medicines, ignorant of what these nostrums contain, and the number of
-deaths resulting from their use continues to increase. The only way to
-protect such people from the result of their little knowledge, which
-is really ignorance, is by making it illegal to sell these drugs,
-except by prescription from a physician, who, in turn, should be held
-responsible for results.
-
-This is, of course, an interference with the individual’s right to do
-as seemeth best to him, and to get his experience in his own way.
-Herbert Spencer says, “The ultimate result of shielding men from
-the effects of folly is to fill the world with fools.” But it is the
-same sort of interference that makes us hold a man by main force from
-throwing himself on the track before an approaching train, and not the
-sort that would forcibly put an overcoat on him when he did not care to
-wear it. One may be no more justifiable than the other, but it seems
-more excusable.
-
-All sleeping doses are to be viewed with distrust; most of them contain
-opium or morphine, some still more deadly drugs: Nature “sets up a
-tolerance” for them so that, to obtain the effect, the dose must be
-increased, until, if the sufferer does not retreat in time, an almost
-incurable drug habit is formed, often more terrible than the liquor
-habit, which it sometimes supplants. Nor do they bring true sleep.
-
-R. Clarke Newton, in his treatise on “Opium and Alcohol,” says
-“Sleeplessness means not merely unrest, but starvation of the cerebrum.
-The only cause for regret in these cases is that the blunder should
-ever be committed of supposing that a stupefying drug which throws the
-brain into a condition that mimics and burlesques sleep can do good.
-It is deceptive to give narcotics in a case of this type. The stupor
-simply masks the danger. Better far let the sleepless patient exhaust
-himself than stupefy him. Chloral, bromides, and the rest of the poisons
-that produce a semblance of sleep are so many snares in such cases.
-Sleeplessness is a malady of the most formidable character, but it is
-not to be treated by intoxicating the organ upon which the stress of
-the trouble falls.” The late Dr. Alonzo Clark, who for years stood at
-the head of his profession as a consulting physician in New York City,
-is quoted as saying, “All curative agents, so called, are poisons,
-and, as a consequence, every dose diminishes the patient’s vitality.” I
-doubt whether this view of drugs would be seriously contested by any of
-his professional brethren of good standing.
-
-The venerable Professor Joseph M. Smith, M.D., said: “All medicines
-which enter the circulation poison the blood in the same manner as do
-the poisons that produce the disease. Drugs do not cure disease.” John
-Bigelow, in the “Mystery of Sleep” (p. 190), adds: “With drug-poisons
-should be classed nearly, if not quite, all fermented drinks—the most
-costly part of some people’s diet who indulge in them at all—coffee,
-tea, tobacco, spices, and most of the constantly multiplying tonics
-and condiments of the table. All of them have a tendency, directly or
-indirectly, to discourage or impair sleep, and, as such, are ‘hostes
-humani generis’ (enemies of the human race). Their interference with
-sleep, though perhaps the most serious, is very far from being their
-only pathogenetic influence.”
-
-Mr. Bigelow then cites from Jahr’s “Manual of Medicine” the fearful
-disturbances of sleep caused by fifteen drugs, all taken as samples
-from the list in their order under the single letter “A.” Contrary
-to the general belief, sleeplessness is more often a consequence of
-insanity than a cause of it. (See Appendix A.)
-
-
-
-
-CHAPTER XVI
-
-DEVICES FOR GOING TO SLEEP
-
- Southey, in “The Doctor,” thus summarizes some of the chief devices
- to attain sleep by monotony: “I listened to the river and to the
- ticking of my watch; I thought of all sleepy sounds and of all
- soporific things—the flow of water, the humming of bees, the motion
- of a boat, the waving of a field of corn, the nodding of a mandarin’s
- head on the chimney-piece, a horse in a mill, the opera, Mr. Humdrum’s
- conversations, Mr. Proser’s poems, Mr. Laxative’s speeches, Mr.
- Lengthy’s sermons. I tried the device of my own childhood, and fancied
- that the bed rushed with me round and round. At length Morpheus
- reminded me of Dr. Torpedo’s Divinity Lectures, where the voice,
- the manner, the matter, even the very atmosphere and the streaming
- candle-light, were all alike soporific; when he who, by strong effort,
- lifted up his head and forced open the reluctant eyes, never failed
- to see all around him asleep. Lettuces, cowslip wine, poppy syrup,
- mandragora, hop pillows, spider’s web pills, and the whole tribe of
- narcotics would have failed—but this was irresistible; and thus twenty
- years after date, I found benefit from having attended the course.”
-
-
-Frequent impressions on the mind, or calls on the attention, tend to
-make us sleepy; thus looking at pictures, the attempt to study, driving
-in a carriage. In extreme cases this is very marked. A boy named Caspar
-Hauser was shut up alone in a gloomy little room until he was about
-eighteen years old; then he was brought to Nürnberg and abandoned in
-the street; this was in 1828. He was to all intents a baby and could
-not walk, nor speak, nor see clearly, as he had never known any of the
-common objects of life—men or animals or plants, or the moon or sun or
-even the sky.
-
-He would go to sleep instantly on being taken outside the house,
-because the number of new sensations instantly tired his consciousness.
-
-For the same reason that the consciousness is quickly exhausted, many
-old or delicate persons readily fall asleep. Marie de Manacéïne says
-that Moivre, the French mathematician, used to sleep twenty hours a
-day during his old age, leaving only four for science and the other
-occupations of life.
-
-Monotony naturally fatigues consciousness and is often successfully
-used to produce sleep; the regular dropping of water, the sound of a
-brook will put those to sleep whom it does not make nervous. Lullabies
-and slumber songs and dull lectures all come under the same head of
-devices to tire the consciousness.
-
-Narcotic drugs do not weary consciousness; they simply destroy it. They
-stupefy us instead of inducing sleep. Those who would wisely learn
-about this by experiments upon others rather than upon themselves, will
-find it all in the article by Ringer and Sainsbury on “Sedatives” in
-Tuke’s “Dictionary of Psychological Medicine.” It is enough for us
-to be assured that narcotic sleep is less like real sleep than the
-hibernation of the animal is like repose. (But see “Remedies” in
-Appendix A.)
-
-Henry Ward Beecher used to get up when he was sleepless and take a
-cold bath, a good device for a full-blooded, vigorous person: but a
-weak person would not “react” and get warm again. For such an one it
-would be better to sponge off and restore the circulation by rubbing.
-Some physicians have prescribed, with good success, blood-warm baths,
-beginning at a temperature of about 98 and heated up to 110 or 115
-Fahrenheit. When the moisture has been absorbed by wrapping one’s self
-in a blanket, throw it off and get quickly into a warm bed. Mark Twain
-used to get to sleep by lying down on the bathroom floor after the bath.
-
-Some, when other means fail, find it effective to place a cold-water
-bag at the back of the neck, or to rub the feet with a rough towel:
-with others, a hot-water bottle at the back of the neck works better.
-A warm footbath helps some persons. At the sanitariums they sponge
-with warm water, rub with wet salt, gently sponge it off, and dry the
-body—all of which helps the blood to the surface. It is always well
-to see that the bowels are emptied. Only trial and judgment will show
-whether any of these will effect a cure: they all aim at the same mark,
-to abstract the blood from the brain.
-
-That drinking milk produces sleep in some persons may probably be due
-to the lactic acid in the milk, which is a soporific like morphine.
-Perhaps its use is to help young animals to the long sleeps they need.
-
-Willard Moyer, in an entertaining essay, tells us that it is often
-advisable for the stomach to have sufficient work for the blood to do
-so as to call it from the brain. This does not mean that a meal that
-will overload the stomach is a cure for insomnia, but that something
-light, such as a cup of warm milk and a cracker, may often “send one
-comfortably to sleep like a drowsy kitten or a well-fed baby.” A.
-Fleming, following Durham, the author of the “Psychology of Sleep,”
-showed that to deprive the brain of blood by pressing the carotid
-arteries for thirty seconds brought immediate and deep sleep, but it
-only continued while all pulsation of these arteries is stopped.[7]
-
-[7] It is interesting also to note that a similar pressure on the
-jugular veins produces loss of consciousness, but from just the
-opposite cause, that is, from congestion of blood in the brain. This
-state of unconsciousness resembles coma just as the other resembles
-sleep.
-
- E. M. W.
-
-
-It has been found by cruel experiments on young puppies that sleep is
-more necessary to them than food, as they die after being kept awake
-four or five days, but may live ten or fifteen days without food. They
-easily go to sleep when their heads are level with their bodies, and
-they will not go to sleep with their heads lower than their bodies: of
-course, the raised head drains some blood out of the brain.
-
-This is the reason that heat or extreme cold, both of which bring the
-blood to the surface and drain it away from the brain, will often
-produce sleep. That is why the cowboy likes to sleep with his feet to
-the fire. On the other hand, the demand on the heart of cold hands
-or feet for more blood to keep them warm may make the heart pump so
-strongly that it sends more blood to the brain and keeps one awake.
-So also joy, anger, or anxiety cause a flow of blood to the brain and
-hinder sleep.
-
-Becker and Schuller have treated insomnia by wrapping the entire body
-in wet sheets and also by applying cold compresses to the head. This
-last device is used by students, with doubtful success, “to keep the
-brain cool”; it is sometimes affected because it looks like working
-hard. Sometimes an ice cap, a double rubber cap filled with cold water,
-will bring sleep.
-
-The Russian nobles used to make servants scratch their heels for a long
-time; our ladies have their hair brushed; and A. H. Savage-Landor says
-that Corean mothers put their babies to sleep by scratching them gently
-on the stomach. I have tried this rubbing, rather than scratching, with
-great success. Spanish women rub the children’s upper spine to put them
-to sleep. Light exercise before lying down is often a good expedient.
-
-Sometimes a pillow of heated hops or of balsam pine needles will induce
-sleep. To change the hour of going to bed occasionally, yielding to
-apparently untimely drowsiness, often helps, as it accustoms us to gain
-sleep at irregular times.
-
-To “relax,” to let the muscles become perfectly loose, is an art,
-though it should be natural to one going to sleep. Mrs. Richard Hovey
-recommends shaking the fingers, letting them hang loose like a bunch
-of strings of beads, and extending the movement to the wrist, arms,
-feet, and legs. This is the best form of calisthenic exercise for
-sleeplessness. It aids us in getting limp so as to lie at ease.
-
-
-
-
-CHAPTER XVII
-
-MORE DEVICES FOR GOING TO SLEEP
-
- Oh Sleep! it is a gentle thing,
- Beloved from pole to pole.
-
- COLERIDGE.
-
-
-If life be a succession of ideas, says Dr. Binns, then sleep is the
-interval; “consequently, we may say that sleep is the art of escaping
-reflection.” If one could follow the Chinese advice, divest the
-mind of all unpleasant images, “the secret of sleep at will,” Dr.
-Binns thinks, “would be in the possession of all men.” This accords
-in its essence with the very modern theory of Dr. Henry Hubbard
-Foster of Cornell University, that sleep results from the absence of
-stimulations. It is conceivable that things that stimulate, or rouse
-us, may come from inside as well as from outside. A sudden thought, a
-new, delightful, or horrible mental picture will arouse us and send
-sleep flying as effectually as a sudden noise or an exciting commotion
-from without.
-
-We might amend the Chinese advice thus: put out of the mind all images,
-pleasant or unpleasant, or, as Dr. Gardner puts it, “bring the mind
-to a single sensation.” It has long been known that monotony will
-induce sleep. Not merely the monotony of silence, but sometimes even
-the monotony of great noise, such as the ceaseless firing of heavy guns
-which have lulled the wearied soldiers into rest. There is a sleepy
-sound in “The distant boom of a random gun which the foe was sullenly
-firing.” It is the sudden, irregular noise which disturbs. If anyone
-listens for several hours to soft, flowing music, he will have great
-difficulty in keeping awake, no matter how great a lover of music he
-may be, particularly if he has to sit in the same position all the
-time. Let a musical number with strongly marked staccato movement be
-introduced, let the drum throb loud at intervals, the horns blare, then
-the sleeper will awake and find renewed enjoyment, not because he loves
-noise, but because the monotony has been broken. The mind has responded
-to the new stimulus.
-
-Professor Boris Sidis, of the Harvard Physiological Laboratory, says
-that “the fundamental conditions of sleep are monotony and limitation
-of voluntary movements. Sleep,” adds Sidis, is not so much due to
-cutting off impressions through the senses, be they intense or faint,
-as to the monotony of the “impressions that reduced the organism to
-the passive state which we experience in sleep.” In other words,
-monotony has such a benumbing, deadening effect upon the mind that
-sleep naturally ensues.
-
-Although Binns did not know Foster’s and Sidis’ modern views, yet
-accepting Gardner’s theory of “bringing the mind to a single
-sensation,” he worked out a plan for inducing sleep which he said
-nearly always succeeded. During his long practice he had known of only
-two instances where it failed when faithfully and intelligently tried.
-
-The method is simple, yet it includes putting out of the mind all
-images pleasant or unpleasant, and restricting voluntary movements. It
-is this: “Turn on the right side, place the head comfortably on the
-pillow, let the head fall naturally, using the pillow only to support
-the neck, slightly close the lips,—though this is not absolutely
-essential,—take full inspiration through the nostrils, drawing in as
-much air as possible, then leave the lungs to their own action, neither
-hastening nor checking exhalation. Think of the breath as passing from
-the nostrils in one continuous stream, and, the very instant the person
-so conceives, consciousness and memory depart, the muscles relax, the
-breath comes regularly, he no longer wakes but sleeps. It is all the
-effort of but a moment.”
-
-Another method in common use is counting up to a hundred on an
-imaginary string of beads. Often one will have lost consciousness
-before the hundredth bead is reached, but sometimes they have to be
-counted over and over, and sometimes the plan fails altogether. The
-immediate reason for this is undoubtedly that we have not brought
-the mind to a single sensation, nor succeeded in cutting off the
-impressions that come through the senses.
-
-Everybody has at some time used some such device for inducing sleep
-to visit him. The practice of imagining sheep jumping over a gate and
-counting them as they go is but another way of bringing the mind to a
-single sensation, of deliberately securing monotony and shutting out
-all stimuli, as scientific men call the various causes that arouse
-sensation in us. Such simple devices are never harmful, and are so
-frequently followed by sleep that they continue from generation to
-generation.
-
-If the impressions received through the channels of sense cannot or
-will not be shut off, it is useless to continue counting beads or
-sheep, or seeing a stream of breath. It becomes necessary to discover
-what it is that is back of the stimulation—what impression is so vivid
-and so insistent that it will not down. As Frederick Palmer says in his
-delightful book, “The Vagabond,” we should “take a good look at a
-thing before we run away from it.”
-
-
-
-
-CHAPTER XVIII
-
-STILL FURTHER DEVICES
-
- The sleep of a laboring man is sweet.
-
- ECCLESIASTES.
-
-
-“The Witchery of Sleep” records for us some interesting mechanical
-devices for inducing sleep, more common in Europe than in this country.
-Their inventors hope to perfect them so that they may take the place
-of drugs and “sleeping potions.” This is an end devoutly to be wished
-by all who know the steady increase of the “drug habit.” Among these
-sleep-inducing instruments the newest is the “vibrating coronet.” This
-coronet has three metal bands which encircle the head and two strips
-extending to the eyelids. By means of a spring these strips vibrate
-the eyelid gently and induce drowsiness. All the mechanical devices
-are constructed on the plan of inducing eye-weariness, whether by
-vibration or by fixity. Either effect is in accordance with the modern
-theories of sleep. Sleep may be induced by monotony also of sounds; by
-concentration either of the attention or the hearing on one point, or
-by more numerous impressions than the eye can comfortably receive;
-thus, when riding in a train, the succession of views will often induce
-sleepiness.
-
-The “Alouette,” a collection of little mirrors attached to the ebony
-panels of a box, is so placed that a ray of light falls on the mirrors
-in such a way as to fatigue the eye of the beholder. Both this and the
-“Fascinator,” a highly polished nickel ball attached to a flexible
-wire depending from a metal band similar to the “Coronet,” work on
-the plan of concentrating the vision. In a similar way a light-house
-or a miniature flashlight, with its appearing and disappearing light,
-induces drowsiness, possibly hypnotic, through incessant change. It is
-needless to say that these devices might be injurious to the sight and
-certainly would not work where the cause of sleeplessness is eyestrain.
-That is a case for the oculist.
-
-But when it is impossible to obtain mechanical devices, there are many
-simple schemes of inducing sleep. Any light work, mental or physical,
-is helpful. To start writing letters, particularly if one is not fond
-of letter-writing, will sometimes induce sleepiness very quickly.
-Sorting and arranging old papers will have the same effect, unless one
-is of a nature to find such an occupation exciting.
-
-Of course, a drawback in any of these light occupations is that by the
-time one has undressed drowsiness may have fled. That possibility
-makes it desirable that all preparations for bed shall first be made
-and a warm robe with comfortable bedroom shoes shall constitute the
-only extra clothing. Warmth of body, especially of the feet, is
-essential to sleep. Sometimes so simple a thing as a hot-water bottle
-at the feet, or even woolen bed-socks, will make all the difference
-between wakefulness and refreshing slumber.
-
-Then there is the matter of deep breathing, which seems especially
-adapted to feeble or run-down physiques. That is a large subject more
-familiar to the people of the Orient than to us. Some Orientals are
-able to put themselves into trance-like sleep by their knowledge of
-deep breathing. Numerous books have been written treating of this
-subject, among the best of which are “The Science of Breath,” by
-Ramacharaka, and “The Law of Rhythmical Breath,” by Ella A. Fletcher,
-though the “Rhythmical Breath” seems fanciful to Western readers.
-
-Sleeplessness is sometimes due to lack of physical exercise, and, when
-that is so, no device is so effective as work—real physical effort. A
-great many persons take calisthenic exercises and go in for physical
-culture to develop muscles and also to regulate circulation so that
-sleep will come more readily. These are good makeshifts for persons
-who have no opportunity to work, but, where circumstances make actual
-labor possible, no substitute can satisfactorily take its place.
-Gardening, shoveling snow, sawing or chopping wood, all give a variety
-of motion and a zest of exertion superior to any gymnastics. Even a
-small amount of some such labor daily will often work a complete cure
-for insomnia.
-
-Everybody knows of some plan or device for inducing sleep, and all of
-them are more or less successful—sometimes. Indeed, this is so true
-that it leads to the belief that, after all, the expectation of sleep
-helps to bring it, and here suggestion and auto-suggestion come in.
-
-Of late, a number of persons have tried the starvation cure—fasting for
-several days. This is frequently successful with robust, hearty people,
-who may unconsciously be eating too much or eating too stimulating
-food. Many who feel unequal to a complete fast might cut down the
-amount of food as much as one-half, with happy results. A vegetarian
-diet undoubtedly helps, too, although among the lower animals
-carnivora sleep more than herbivora. The success of vegetarianism,
-both in insomnia and other diseases, may well be due to the diminished
-temptation to overeat and the less concentrated diet.
-
-In any event, it is well for the sufferer from sleeplessness to study
-his own case and experiment with any or all the known devices to see
-whether, by this means or that, he can lure sleep to his pillow again.
-
-And, speaking of pillows, it is well to remember that one pillow is
-better than two, and that the one should not be too high, too hard, too
-soft, or too warm, and that it should be thoroughly aired every day.
-It should be odorless and cool and have the cover changed frequently.
-Clean bed linen is in itself an effective device for inducing sleep,
-just as perfect ventilation adds an hundredfold to the refreshment we
-get from our slumbers.
-
-The best way to learn to sleep is to practice putting others to sleep.
-Thy gifts will be unto thyself when thy benefits are to another.
-
-We never know anything thoroughly till we try to teach it. All these
-plans and devices may be suggested one by one to any sleepless person.
-Select what you think most suitable and most likely to be accepted, and
-let the suggestion be that this is a good plan or something just called
-to your attention that seems sensible. If you do not succeed in one or
-two, it is difficult to secure trial of more at that time.
-
-Every temperament is different and may respond to different methods:
-for instance, a ticking clock or dropping water, which make some
-persons drowsy, will make others inexpressibly nervous.
-
-The trained nurse will tell you that, when you are trying to get the
-patient to sleep, whispering must not be allowed: the sibilant sound
-is irritating and the patient unconsciously strains to catch what is
-said. Speak in a quiet, even, ordinary tone. Do not fuss, putting the
-shade a little higher and lower, stealing across the room, and so on.
-If anything is to be done, to walk quietly and naturally will disturb
-the sleeper much less than tiptoeing about.
-
-That mysterious thing that we call “personality” has much to do with
-the power to bring sleep to others. Some persons can put almost anyone
-to sleep by quietly holding the hand, but nearly everyone has some of
-this power. Some persons, especially children, are readily got to sleep
-by lying down beside them.
-
-Reading aloud slowly and in a uniform voice will bring sleep to most
-persons. When drowsiness comes, the voice may be lowered a little and
-continued until slumber closes the eyes. (Concerning the varieties and
-causes of Insomnia, see also Appendix A.)
-
-
-
-
-CHAPTER XIX
-
-HYPNOTIC SLEEP
-
- What would we give to our beloved?
- The hero’s heart to be unmoved,—
- The poet’s star-tuned harp to sweep;
- The patriot’s voice to teach and rouse,—
- The monarch’s crown to light the brows?
- “He giveth His belovèd sleep.”
- ELIZABETH BARRETT BROWNING.
-
-
-The nature of hypnotic sleep has not yet been fully determined, which
-is not wonderful when we remember our ignorance of natural sleep. We
-may call the active hypnotic state a condition of excessive attention
-to the main idea presented and complete oblivion to other ideas. But
-this state is preceded by a passive condition resembling sleep. The
-use and value of hypnotic sleep is now occupying the attention of
-scientific men and it bids fair to be an important curative agent.
-Where once the patient suffering from insomnia was treated by drugs,
-he is now more successfully treated through suggestion. The change
-is a most desirable one and in line with that newer thought which
-recognizes the power of regeneration within the soul of the individual.
-For, the main things in the development of hypnosis and suggestion as
-curative agents is the recognition that an appeal can be made to the
-subconscious mind, which, as Dr. Worcester says, “is more sensitive
-to good and evil than our conscious mind.” To appeal to our latent
-powers to overcome our own weaknesses or limitations is greater and
-better than to combat these weaknesses through drugs. Many physicians
-who formerly employed hypnosis have adopted a substitute for it, the
-so-called hypnoidal state, mere passivity with closed eyes. Hypnotizing
-is in many cases needless and dangerous.
-
-Insomnia, like any other trouble not due to the breakdown of a physical
-organ, is more a moral than a material lapse, and can best be cured
-by moral means: that is, by the aid of the will and its associated
-faculties. Sleeplessness, nervousness, excitability, and irritability
-have their rise in mental and emotional states more often than in
-physical states, and, under such conditions, treatment by drugs is of
-little real use. In the disease hysteria, mental trouble may masquerade
-as physical defect, for instance paralysis or even blindness, while
-the physical parts concerned are in no wise impaired. The dependence
-placed upon merely extraneous things does not assist in the development
-of our own inner powers. Even when drugs seem to relieve the outward
-symptoms, they fail to strengthen the moral nature, so greatly in need
-of strength. The man of drugs only is at a disadvantage as compared
-with the suggestionist in treating such disorders. Dr. J. D. Quackenbos
-says, “The suggestionist invokes the better subliminal self—invests
-it with control, and seldom fails to effect the desired purpose.” He
-further maintains, what all investigators are now coming to admit,
-that, when the patient wakes from hypnotic sleep, during which helpful,
-curative suggestions have been made to him, he is “constrained to
-obey the impulses of his own superior self.” The power of suggestion,
-whether during waking or sleeping hours, is only beginning to be
-recognized, although its use in one form or another is centuries old.
-The thoughtless, as well as the thoughtful, use it more or less every
-hour of the day, while all of us may know that we are occasionally the
-victims of auto-suggestion when we suffer from functional ailments.
-
-Auto-suggestion is merely the suggestion of the self to the self, and
-from ill-advised suggestions spring nearly all the little impediments
-to sleep and health. Such a suggestion to ourselves as that we need
-certain favorable conditions for sleeping will keep us awake when those
-conditions are not possible. We say, “I cannot sleep with a clock
-ticking in the room with me,” and so we lie awake and suffer nervous
-tortures if we hear a clock tick. Or we say of something our friends
-do, or of some natural habit they have, “That makes me so nervous I
-almost fly out of my skin” thus we inflict upon ourselves suffering
-that we need not endure.
-
-The strong soul will call his “superior self” to his aid to conquer
-this tendency. He will suggest to himself that he is able to sleep
-without regard to clocks or other disturbance; that the peculiarities
-of other people have no power to irritate, annoy, or otherwise upset
-his nervous system; that even in the midst of alarums he may have
-peace, if he so wills, and can sleep under ordinary conditions without
-fear or annoyance.
-
-But, to be able to do this, one must have faith in himself, in
-his purpose, in his own desire to overcome his fears, for, as Dr.
-Worcester remarks, “the value of suggestion lies in its character
-and in the character of the man who makes it.” If we say these things
-to ourselves, feeling all the time that it is useless, we are
-not likely to impress the subconscious mind or rouse it to activity.
-Self-deception is not often beneficial in its effects. No more shall we
-make headway if we merely repeat such suggestions in parrot-fashion.
-You remember the story of the old woman who heard that faith would
-remove mountains: so she determined to try it on the hill in front of
-her bedroom window. All night she repeated to herself that the mountain
-would be removed. In the morning she awoke to see the hill still in
-front of her. “There,” she said, “I knew it would be.” Anyhow, the
-faith that removes most mountains is the faith that gets a shovel. It
-is essential that we concentrate our minds upon the matter in hand,
-excluding from our thoughts anything that might distract us and that
-we fix our attention upon removing the fault. It is for this reason
-that the hypnoidal state, or the wakeful night or the moment when one
-is nearly dropping to sleep is the best time either for suggestion
-to a patient or for one to indulge in helpful auto-suggestion. As
-objective consciousness fades, it is easier to impress the subliminal
-self-consciousness and invoke its aid.
-
-Those who do not know themselves well enough to be able to respond
-to their own suggestion, may be helped by another in whom they have
-faith. If they submit themselves willingly to suggestion, they may find
-themselves so strengthened that they will shortly be able to control
-themselves by auto-suggestion. Like almost all upward tendencies, this
-power is a matter of development.
-
-As we come to understand hypnotism better, we learn that we need not
-fear ill results from thus yielding ourselves for a good purpose to
-another,[8] for one’s subconscious self is always on watch and will
-not be compelled to do that which is contrary to one’s own nature or
-habit of thought. Hypnotic sleep differs from natural sleep in that
-the hypnotized person usually preserves a degree of intelligence and
-invariably a moral sense which are not conspicuous in normal sleep and
-dreaming. Scientific investigators are quite well agreed on this point,
-and Dr. Worcester’s experience has convinced him of its truth.
-
-[8] There are grave dangers attendant on hypnotism for entertainment.
-Prof. C. H. Judd of the University of Chicago says: “There is
-no justification whatever for the use of hypnosis as a means of
-amusement.” See Judd: Psychology.
-
-So, if all other means of securing sleep should fail, we may have
-recourse to this newest method of curing nervous and other functional
-disorders. It is merely one way of getting into closer touch with the
-Infinite and Universal and coming into line with life’s underlying laws.
-
-The use of auto-suggestion is not limited to inducing sleep: it may rid
-us of evil habits, disturbing thoughts, and all hatred, malice, and
-uncharitableness—which in their turn interfere with sleep.
-
-
-THE LAND OF NOD
-
- From breakfast on through all the day
- At home among my friends I stay;
- But every night I go abroad
- Afar into the land of Nod.
-
- All by myself I have to go,
- With none to tell me what to do—
- All alone beside the streams
- And up the mountain-sides of dreams.
-
- The strangest things are there for me,
- Both things to eat and things to see,
- And many frightening sights abroad
- Till morning in the land of Nod.
-
- Try as I like to find the way,
- I never can get back by day,
- Nor can remember plain and clear
- The curious music that I hear.
-
- ROBERT LOUIS STEVENSON.
-
-
-
-
-CHAPTER XX
-
-“PERCHANCE TO DREAM”
-
-“We are such stuff as dreams are made on,” as Shakespeare says,
-and yet no one even to this day knows what that “stuff” may be.
-We separate man’s life into intellect, feeling, will; or, like the
-Hindoos, into seven phases; we subdivide these, recognizing special
-powers and functions belonging to each; we dissect man’s frame; we
-dissolve his body into its component parts, and yet, when all is done,
-we know as little about _life_, the essence of man, as our father Adam
-knew. As Omar says, we hear “much talk about it and about” and yet we
-get nowhere. It is much the same with dreams. We need, therefore, only
-summarize and review the talk.
-
-Dreams occupied their most important place in the thought of man at its
-beginning. His action has frequently been directed by a dream and the
-fate of nations has hinged upon its interpretation. Even in the present
-day of matter-of-fact science, at some time in his life following the
-racial bent, almost every human being has paid some attention to his
-dreams. The superstitious—which includes the most of us—still put
-faith in their dreams, though they know not whence they come, nor their
-relation to the most mutable of physical conditions. And this though
-ages ago Sirach uttered this warning, “Dreams deceive many and fail
-those who build upon them.” Scientific investigation has made known
-many of the causes of dreams and shown us what slight incidents may
-determine their direction. For instance, dreams involving hearing often
-take their rise in noises made by the processes going on in the body.
-What we eat and the state of our digestion greatly affect the character
-of our dreams.
-
-This has long been recognized by those who try to decipher special
-significance in dreams. Twenty-five centuries ago Pythagoras believed
-that the gas-generating beans destroyed the chance of having
-enlightening or important dreams, and so forbade their use. In similar
-fashion interpreters of dreams were warned by Artemidorus to inquire
-first whether the dreamer had eaten heartily or lightly before falling
-asleep; while Philostratus maintained that skillful interpreters always
-refused to expound dreams following the use of wine.
-
-Thus we see that even in ancient times the relation between eating and
-sleeping was recognized. In more modern days it is recorded that poets
-and writers had visions from eating raw flesh, while Mrs. Radcliffe,
-author of “The Mysteries of Udolpho,” is said to have deliberately
-induced horrid dream phantoms by supping late on indigestible food as
-a means of getting “printer’s copy.” De Quincey’s “Confessions” is a
-monument to the beauty and the horror of the dreams from drugs. There
-is also reason to think that the terrors of delirium tremens are true
-dreams. John B. Gough described from fearful experience the agony of
-seeing and feeling that which is dreadful, mainly because the sufferer
-knows that it, nevertheless, does not exist and could not exist. This
-can be explained, in our present state of knowledge, only by the
-supposition that the subconscious mind, uncorrected and unrestrained by
-the senses, alone is awake. Boris Sidis shows that we have no waking
-remembrance of many of our dreams, even of most harassing ones.
-
-It is probable that perfect sleep is undisturbed by dreams, pleasant
-or otherwise. Dreams are an evidence of the semi-conscious condition
-of some of the senses; the objective mind is no longer in control, but
-is passive, and the subjective mind is active. Yet while dreaming, the
-objective mind is not so completely unconscious (as it would be if
-wrapped in profound slumber) but that it gets glimpses of the workings
-of the subjective mind, often very distorted glimpses. This frequently
-leads to horrible or impossible situations in dreams.
-
-It is an interesting question how far we are responsible for our
-dreams. It is true in dreams, as in waking, that from the same
-sensations individuals will evolve different results, just as
-nasturtiums, drawing nourishment from the same soil, will put forth
-blossoms of different color and odor. The factor that changes these
-same elements into different results is something inherent in the
-individual person or plant.
-
-So that we are not entirely responsible for what we dream, yet the
-mental habits, the real tone of mind maintained during waking hours,
-has its effect upon dreams. They constitute an index of the mind. So
-far as sleep is concerned, of course, “subjective” mind is simply our
-remembered experiences, our mental capital, and can be used in waking
-hours and is constantly so used: we get traces of these in our dreams.
-Age, sex, and temperament also affect the nature of dreams.
-
-If then our sleep is disturbed by unpleasant dreams, it becomes
-necessary to investigate the causes. Have we eaten too much or too
-hurriedly? Are our innermost thoughts clean and wholesome, fit for the
-light of day? Roman philosophers held that he who wished to obtain
-knowledge of the will of any of the gods, must fast and lie down to
-sleep beside the shrine of the god, his thoughts filled with longing
-and desire for such knowledge. There is more than mere superstition
-in that. If we abstain from all excesses and are filled with desire
-to know the will of the gods, dreams, when they come to us, will not
-disturb or distress us.
-
-Dreams are admittedly sometimes prophetic, or have at least an indirect
-significance touching events not yet come to pass. Galen tells of
-a man who dreamed that his leg had turned to stone, and a few days
-later found his leg paralyzed, perhaps an instance of auto-suggestion.
-Gessner died from a malignant growth which developed in his breast in
-the exact spot where, a few nights previously, he had dreamed that a
-serpent bit him; while Aristides, dreaming that he was wounded in the
-knee by a bull, awoke to find a tumor there.
-
-These and many better authenticated cases of dream warnings are not so
-strange as they seem at first hearing. They may be explained largely
-by the fact that remote and vague sensations of suffering and disease
-are able to make deeper impression upon the mind when the interests and
-activities of the waking life are submerged in sleep.
-
-The duration of dreams is another matter of great interest. Most
-persons feel and say that they “dreamed all night long,” and will
-proceed to support their statement by relating various incidents
-of their dreams; their prolonged sensations of pleasure or horror;
-the events that perhaps covered years. Yet, in reality, the dream
-may have occupied less than a minute. The dreamer cannot measure
-the time spent in dreaming, for the unconscious condition of the
-objective mind obliterates the sense of time, space or material
-limitations. This accounts for the prodigious feats, the marvels and
-impossible achievements of dreams that seem to the dreamer in no way
-disproportionate.
-
-What we do know is that some of the most wonderful dreams have occupied
-but a few moments, and so far scientific research seems to limit them
-to an hour or two at most. Mohammed’s dream was completed within the
-time occupied by a falling vase; and it is on record that a man fell
-asleep just as the clock struck the first stroke of twelve and awoke
-in a cold sweat on the last stroke, having dreamed that he had spent
-thirty years in prison, suffering tortures of mind and body.
-
-All this makes it easy to understand how, to an infinite mind, a
-thousand years may be as one day and one day as a thousand years, and
-how, in our degree, the quiet, self-controlled mind may be unmoved by
-time.
-
-It is the vivid impression made by such dreams that makes us feel that
-they must have lasted a long time. Then, as George Trumbull Ladd says,
-the recital of our dreams is often colored, unconsciously, “by our
-self-conscious and rational waking life when we bring the scene before
-the awakened mind.” In other words, many sensations that we think we
-experienced are heightened by the idea in the objective mind of what
-such sensations ought to be.
-
-It may be that when the time comes that
-
- “No one shall work for money
- And no one shall work for fame,”
-
-we shall find light and help in our dreams that is undreamed of now.
-
-
-
-
-CHAPTER XXI
-
-NATURAL LIVING
-
- Sleep, the saint that evil thoughts and aims
- Takest away, and into souls dost creep,
- Like to a breeze from heaven.
-
- WORDSWORTH.
-
-
-He who would get the benefit of sleep must look after health.
-
-Health, after all, is merely that condition where all parts of the
-human organism work together without friction. We think of health as
-something that is bestowed upon us from without; something over which
-we have no control and almost no influence. Perhaps this queer idea is
-partly responsible for the general lack of health to-day.
-
-It seems incredible that it is necessary that human beings endowed with
-tremendous capacity for enjoyment, with everything at hand to enjoy,
-should be hindered by a mere lack of that harmony that we call health
-from fully enjoying life. It seems only reasonable that there must be
-some explanation of lack of health and some way of escape from it.
-
-It is now generally admitted that most of the diseases to which man
-thinks himself heir are due to improper, unnatural living. It could
-safely be added that the remainder of our ill-health and distress comes
-in large part from improper, unnatural thinking.
-
-The common man may laugh at the idea that we make our own ill-health;
-if you were not more intelligent than the common man, you would not
-read this book, so that you will probably see at once that your own
-experience has taught you the truth of it. You will discover that you
-have learned for yourself, albeit for the most part unconsciously, that
-what a man thinks about, that he becomes. So it would seem that the
-natural and proper thing to do, if we find ourselves suffering from
-sleeplessness and ill-health, is to look after our way of living and
-thinking.
-
-Medical science was once the attempt to cure disease; as Dr. Woods
-Hutchinson says, it is now coming to be the science of preventing
-disease, and everything that tends to that end is properly a part of
-the science of medicine, though it have no connection with the myriad
-drugs of the pharmacopœia.
-
-Until we compare conditions to-day with those of even fifty years
-ago, we can form no idea of our rapid strides toward natural living.
-If we walk the streets of the city or the roads of suburban towns and
-villages very early in the morning, at any season of the year, we
-shall find the vast majority of the houses with open windows. It is
-true that the opening may not always be very wide, but they are open.
-Fifty years ago all would have been closed.
-
-Within the recollection of those whose memories go back a quarter of
-a century, we were taught that night air was dangerous to breathe and
-was to be completely shut out from our houses. Now we know that the
-organism needs fresh air by night as well as by day, and that the most
-dangerous thing about night air is the lack of it.
-
-We now treat the most dreaded diseases, pneumonia and tuberculosis,
-almost wholly by fresh air and nourishing food, administering drugs
-only to check the symptoms until the system gets into condition to
-throw them off. More than that, we know now that consumption, at least,
-is not a mysterious dispensation of Providence visited upon certain
-people without regard to individual responsibility. Rather it is always
-the result of improper living or thinking, or both, and, when it is
-the scourge of a district, as in thickly settled city slums, it is the
-direct result of monopoly and oppression that deny the common interests
-of all mankind.
-
-In 1865 Dr. W. W. Hall of New York published his book, “Sleep,” in
-the preface of which he said: “It is the end and aim of this book to
-show that as a means of high health, good blood, and a strong mind to
-old and young, sick or well, each one should have a single bed in
-a large, clean, light room, so as to pass all the hours of sleep in
-a pure, fresh air, and that those who fail in this, will in the end
-fail in health and strength of limb and brain, and will die while yet
-their days are not all told.” That this physician with a large practice
-should find it necessary to write a book to set forth the necessity
-of fresh air during sleeping-hours, goes to show how little the mass
-of our people knew even fifty years ago. We hear so much about fresh
-air in these days that we forget that the preceding generation was in
-deadly terror of it.
-
-All things point to a marked advance during the past decades, in the
-understanding of conditions necessary for health, but, after all, we
-have come but a very little way along the road we must travel to get
-the most out of life.
-
-We owe a good deal of our advance in this direction to physicians and
-others who have broken loose from traditions and have not feared to
-put their ideas and discoveries to the test. Nature has provided all
-things for “the healing of the nations,” if we but trust her. As Dr.
-Shattuck, a famous Boston surgeon, used to say in making his rounds in
-the Massachusetts General Hospital, “There is one inestimable gift
-God has given to man—an abundance of fresh air.” It was his method of
-announcing that he did not think the ventilation of room or ward was
-sufficient, and the nurses understood that, and immediately admitted
-more air into the room.
-
-In the wards of that great institution were dozens of persons who had
-never before heard of the value of fresh air: being compelled by evil
-social conditions to live in districts where sunshine and air were
-rarities, they had never heard of any relation between health and fresh
-air. They frequently learned that lesson there.
-
-A little device which we call “the Perfect Gift of Sleep” is a great
-help in excluding the light without excluding the air, and especially
-valuable in that most delightful change, sleeping out of doors. A bag
-is made of dark green or blue or black silk or satin, about four inches
-wide and eight inches long, and very loosely filled with sweet pine
-needles. It is laid lightly over the eyes.
-
-This may seem too trivial to bother about, but the increased comfort
-and the better quality of sleep which it brings is astonishing.
-
-
-
-
-CHAPTER XXII
-
-FRESH AIR AND REFRESHING SLEEP
-
- Somnus, that walks the world from twilights’ wane
- All the night long till day be born again.
-
- EDGAR FAWCETT.
-
-
-It is not so necessary now as when Dr. Hall wrote to urge the
-importance of large, airy sleeping-rooms. But it is amazing to find how
-many, even among the so-called “better classes,” neglect to open their
-windows wide at night. I have known people out in the country whose
-bedroom windows could hardly be made to open, so seldom did they admit
-the air. Indeed, they were also heavily shaded so that they might not
-admit the sunshine.
-
-That such people have been able to live at all is due to the patience
-of Nature, or to the fact that so much of the day is spent in the open
-air that it helps to counteract the effect of the closed-up night. Even
-then they do not escape early wrinkles, bent shoulders, and a look of
-age long before their time. We used to attribute these to the hard
-work of the farmer’s life, but we might more properly attribute it to
-improper living.
-
-Besides an abundance of fresh air day and night, summer and winter,
-personal cleanliness immensely aids to health and the ability to sleep.
-In the old days we bathed to clean ourselves when dirty. It was an
-advance on that when someone said he took a bath every spring and fall,
-whether he needed it or not. In those days once a week was considered
-frequent. To-day we bathe to keep clean.
-
-Someone, probably Joseph Fels, has said that the civilization of
-a people may best be estimated by the amount of soap and water it
-consumes. If we start out well-groomed in the morning—fresh from the
-bath with clean linen, clothes brushed and all our personal needs duly
-attended to—we carry our heads higher, feel an uplift of body and mind
-that is impossible to the careless or untidy person.
-
-The same influence applies to going to bed at night. If we retire
-soiled and worn from the day’s experiences, we may toss and turn
-with discomfort whose source we may not understand, or we fall into
-heavy, unrefreshing sleep. The body does most of its breathing during
-sleeping-time. You know how the moisture from the breath shows on a
-mirror when you breathe on it: well, the skin gives off about three
-times as much moisture as the breath, and, unless the pores of the skin
-are free from all obstructions such as dust, old, dried perspiration,
-and similar soil, it cannot perform its work properly and to the
-advantage of the sleeper. If you don’t like water, use oil as the
-Easterns do. Even dry rubbing, if the skin is moist, will keep the
-pores open.
-
-The little trouble entailed is more than offset by the refreshed
-feeling, the lightening of the mind as well as of the body, the more
-restful sleep, and the better health resulting from the practice.
-
-One of the advantages of the night bath is that it reminds us to change
-all the clothes we have worn during the day. If they must be worn again
-the next day, they should be spread out on the backs of chairs or on
-hangers, that they may be thoroughly aired before morning. If we feel
-that we must have something more than the pajamas or night-robe, then
-there should be separate sets of underclothes kept for that purpose
-alone—old, thin, partly-worn ones may be reserved for this use.
-
-Whether baths should be hot, warm, or cold must depend upon the
-individual. There is no set rule that applies equally to all persons.
-Many persons find the cold plunge or shower most invigorating in the
-morning,—it is too stimulating to be taken at night—and others cannot
-stand the shock of contact with cold water at any time. There is but
-one wise thing to do—to experiment for yourself and adopt the sort of
-bath that seems best suited to your needs. Most people will find the
-warm bath more satisfactory than the hot or cold.
-
-And remember that it is not only the lungs that need fresh air: the
-skin needs it too, and, next to overeating, the quickest way to
-“catch” cold is to bundle up in heavy perspiration-holding flannels.
-Linen mesh is excellent, but, whatever underclothing is worn, it should
-not suffocate the millions of pores of the skin.
-
-An airy room, free from hangings, carpets, street clothes, and all
-other dust-gatherers; a clean body; a contented mind—these are
-important factors both in sleep and in general health, and, best of
-all, they are inexpensive enough to be within the reach of nearly
-everybody.
-
-
-
-
-CHAPTER XXIII
-
-THE BREATH OF LIFE
-
- In winter I get up at night
- And dress by yellow candle-light.
- In summer, quite the other way,
- I have to go to bed by day.
-
- I have to go to bed and see
- The birds still hopping on the tree,
- Or hear the grown-up people’s feet
- Still going past me in the street.
-
- And does it not seem hard to you,
- When all the sky is clear and blue,
- And I should like so much to play,
- To have to go to bed by day?
-
- “Bed in Summer.”
- ROBERT LOUIS STEVENSON.
-
-
-One of the most common causes of ill-health and sleeplessness is
-improper breathing. Breathing is the fundamental function of life, the
-first at birth and the last at death, and when it is badly performed we
-are sure to have trouble. The great majority of people never use the
-whole of their lungs in breathing. By this neglect the blood is never
-sufficiently oxygenated to burn out all impurities.
-
-But you may say, “I am not responsible for the way I breathe; I do
-that “automatically,” and you would be in a degree correct. It is
-true that we are not conscious of the act of breathing. It would be an
-intolerable burden upon the mind if every breath required conscious
-attention. We could hardly attend to anything else.
-
-That is no reason, however, why we should not regulate our breathing
-for our own benefit. Breathing, though an habitual organic act, is
-under the indirect control of the higher centers of the nervous system.
-We must, as Dr. Worcester says, re-educate the lower centers to
-breathe, and to do this it is necessary to give conscious attention to
-it for a time. If we wish to replace bad breathing by good breathing,
-we must fix our attention regularly upon drawing the breath, practice
-the right sort of breathing, and impress upon the vital mechanism that
-this new order of breathing is to be adopted, for the way to be rid of
-a bad habit is to replace it with a good one. If we persevere in this
-course, the right method can very easily be established.
-
-By the right method is meant breathing from the diaphragm. If you
-will watch the act of breathing among your friends for even one day,
-you will discover for yourself how few do it well. The great majority
-breathe with the upper part of the lungs only, so that the chest
-visibly rises and falls in time with the inhalations and exhalations.
-Such persons may be unconscious of their own breathing, but they make
-all who observe them conscious of it. They are not only injuring
-themselves, but making a claim upon the attention of others that is
-scarcely justifiable.
-
-Quick, short breathing is one of the signs either of excitement or of
-depression, some pleasurable or painful emotion or sensation, but it
-is not a means to health. If we have this habit, we may find in it an
-explanation of many of the trifling ills and discomforts from which we
-suffer, and of not a few of the more serious ones.
-
-Emily M. Bishop, who has given much study to the effect of our habits
-of mind and body upon our health and spirits, says, in her latest book,
-“Daily Ways of Living,” that we may change the whole current of our
-thought by a change in breathing. She wisely advises her readers the
-next time they feel depressed or worried, “blue,” or “miserable,” to
-try drawing deep, full breaths. If you are not in good spirits, try
-that now: “spirit” means the breath.
-
-Open the windows and let in fresh air, if within doors; inhale deeply,
-hold it, and then exhale rather quickly. After only four or five such
-inhalations you will find that the miserable feeling has disappeared or
-is greatly lessened. The “blues” cannot live while good red blood is
-circulating rapidly through the veins and arteries. It is only when the
-blood is sluggish or not sufficiently purified by the indrawn oxygen
-that worry and depression can hold us in their thrall. Deep breathing
-is a simple remedy for the blues, but its effectiveness makes it worth
-trying.
-
-Proper breathing will often ward off a cold, especially a cold due to
-chill. As soon as you feel yourself getting chilly, act. The feeling of
-chilliness is a proof that the resistance of the body is below normal.
-The cause may be interior, due to the presence of some poison in the
-system, or it may be due entirely to external causes. In either event,
-to purify the blood and improve its circulation is the best sort of
-“first aid to the injured.” Inhale until you can feel it in your fingers
-and toes, exhale quickly, and repeat the operation until you feel
-all aglow. Mlle. Marie de Palkowska, whose special work is teaching
-correct breathing, says: “The nerve centers are directly affected
-by the condition of the blood, and they are enfeebled, contracted,
-or irritated by an excess of carbon and nitrogen in it, producing
-depression of spirits; but, if the blood is circulating freely, the
-nerves are quieted and well-nourished by the supply of oxygen, through
-the process of correct breathing, and the result is perfect health of
-mind and body and a happy optimism.” Worry, sleeplessness, and disease
-do not easily lay hold upon one who has “perfect health of mind and
-body and a happy optimism.” If these may be secured through intelligent
-attention to breathing, there is no reason why they should not be as
-common as they are natural. The more we look into the question of
-health, whether physical, mental, or moral, the more clearly we see
-that poise is only possible through conformity to universal law. It
-could not be otherwise.
-
-Earlier in this inquiry we have traced the interdependence, the unity
-of man’s three natures—the physical, the mental, and the spiritual,—and
-the value of correct breathing to the whole man is in perfect keeping
-with that interdependence. In the process of digestion, upon which
-physical health so largely depends, we create poisons within ourselves
-and accumulate waste matter. The organism must be momently purified
-of these wastes, or putrefaction quickly follows. Autotoxins form, as
-the doctors say. The function of breathing, when properly controlled,
-affords the quickest and best method of cleansing the blood of these
-impurities. If we have not this proper control, the poisons are not
-eliminated and the supply of blood to the brain is vitiated.
-
-Just as the body cannot perform its functions well if we are compelled
-to live upon tainted food, so the brain cannot do its work well if
-the blood—its food—is impure. Breathing which expands the diaphragm
-so purifies the blood as it passes through the lungs, that it becomes
-an important factor in maintaining health and poise in body and mind,
-which in their turn react upon the spirit.
-
-This sort of breathing is more common among men than among women,
-due in part to natural physical differences and in part to dress.
-Man breathes largely from the abdomen, while woman breathes chiefly
-from the chest, expanding only the upper portion of the lungs. This
-is partly a natural and partly an artificial necessity, due to the
-pressure of the corset upon the diaphragm. Both men and women would
-find their physical health improved and their outlook on life broadened
-and brightened by proper control of the function of breathing. If we
-are sleepless, nervous, too alert, as well as if we are heavy, dull,
-and inactive, we will find it worth our while to try conscious breath
-control. It takes but a comparatively short time to re-educate the
-automatic centers into correct breathing and the result is always good.
-
-It no less behooves the man who is trying to live largely on the
-rational plane, than the man who is living wholly on the physical
-plane, to make his efforts both easier and more effective by such
-simple attention to natural laws. The next time you are worried,
-depressed, or sleepless, change the air of the room and try deep and
-correct breathing for a few minutes. You will be surprised at the
-complete change wrought in you, if you are not suffering from some
-serious organic breakdown which needs skilled attention. And even that
-condition may be helped by proper breathing.
-
-But we are not to forget that, like calisthenic and gymnastic
-exercises, the training of the breathing is really little more than a
-device for correcting the results of wrong living and only a substitute
-for right living. The man or the woman who does plenty of healthful,
-normal work, who often pants and gets “out of breath,” naturally
-expands the lungs and has as little use for breathing exercises as for
-tight clothing.
-
-A buck-saw, a spade, or even a broom is better than a teacher of
-breathing and a better corrector of sleeplessness.
-
-
-
-
-CHAPTER XXIV.
-
-EATING AND SLEEPING
-
- For his sleep
- Was aery light, from pure digestion bred.
-
- MILTON.
-
-
-We do not have to depend upon mere irresponsible guesses for the new
-faith in the possibility of longer life for man. Scientists have been
-experimenting along this line for some years, and Metchnikoff assures
-us that the average human life should exceed “three-score years and
-ten” by four decades.
-
-He points out that the greatly increased number of persons who remain
-physically and mentally active past the age of seventy-five and eighty
-years is itself a proof that life may be prolonged. He recognizes that
-merely to extend existence is not a sufficient end to work for—it must
-be an active, worthwhile existence, and he has experimented toward this
-end.
-
-All of us can recall instances of “old people” who have preserved
-their physical and mental faculties until their last years. We have
-been in the habit of regarding these people as exceptions and have
-perhaps not noticed that these “exceptions” are already almost
-frequent enough to prove that there is no such rule for longevity.
-
-Whenever we investigate a new and wonderful thing, we find that
-its causes are simple and ordinary. So Metchnikoff and kindred
-experimenters are beginning to show us that prolonging life is a
-comparatively simple matter. It comes back again to diet and sleep on
-the physical side and to understanding of the universal laws on the
-mental and the emotional side of life.
-
-All scientific men agree that nearly all of us eat too much, or eat
-improper food. Most of them say that we sleep too much, or try to sleep
-too much. They advise simple diet, varied but not heavy. It is probable
-that the early human being ate as the wild animals do, to appease
-hunger, and had to eat whatever he could find without regard to taste.
-As civilization advanced and he learned ways of getting increased
-returns from Nature, he began to select and choose what he should eat.
-In this way he developed “appetite” as apart from natural hunger, and
-as his knowledge increased, and his taste became more and more refined,
-appetite gradually took the place of hunger.
-
-People ordinarily seldom know the pleasure of satisfying real hunger.
-Because of habit, the appetite stirs as often as three or five times
-a day and we gratify it. We must have certain foods prepared in a
-certain way. Eating becomes an end in itself, rather than merely a
-means to an end. If appetite is fully indulged, he becomes heavy,
-suffers from indigestion and sleeplessness, talks of stomach trouble
-and consequent “loss of appetite.” He seeks a physician to restore
-what he is really better without. Not every physician is as wise as
-the one to whom a cook once applied. She told her story of inability
-to eat her meals, of uncertain and unrestful sleep, increased weight,
-and shortness of breath. The physician heard her tale of woe and asked
-her the size of the family for which she cooked and about their mode
-of living. He learned that the family consisted of five, and that they
-entertained lavishly. “Do you taste all the food you prepare?” was the
-next question.
-
-“Yes, sir; I must taste it to be sure it is just right.” “Ah!”
-replied the doctor; “put on a plate exactly the same quantity of
-everything that you take to taste—no more, no less—and send it to me
-to-morrow evening.”
-
-Much to the cook’s astonishment, at the close of the next day, which
-had included a dinner-party, there was a heaping platter of food, more
-than she would have thought it possible to eat even at three meals.
-
-“It is not a tonic you want,” said the physician. “You already eat
-too much, which accounts for your loss of appetite, shortness of
-breath, and sleeplessness. It may be necessary for you to taste all
-the food you cook, but take smaller ‘tastes’ and eat nothing else on
-cooking days. I cannot help you; you must help yourself.” (Being an
-ignorant woman, she went to another doctor and got some ill-tasting
-drug.)
-
-And such is, after all, the decision of all the scientific
-investigators into the life and health of men: We must help ourselves
-by understanding the laws of life and observing them.
-
-Most rich persons are really like the man who applied to his physician
-about “loss of appetite.” “Try beginning dinner with raw oysters,”
-said the doctor. In a few days the patient returned, to say that the
-oysters did no good.
-
-“Maybe you didn’t eat enough?” said the doctor.
-
-“Well,” said the man, “I ate four dozen.”
-
-
-
-
-CHAPTER XXV
-
-SLEEPING AND EATING
-
- Man’s rich restorative, his balmy bath
- That supplies, lubricates and keeps in play
- The various movements of this nice machine.
-
- YOUNG.
-
-
-“There are more things in heaven and earth than are dreamt of” in
-anybody’s philosophy or understanding of living; it is not strange that
-the great mass have not dreamed of eating as a cause of sleeplessness
-and ill-health, though they may dream in consequence of it. It is
-generally believed that a hearty meal of any indigestible food
-immediately before bed is bad for sleep: yet animals and primitive
-men always sleep after they are gorged. But few recognize that the
-whole plan of eating may be responsible for sleeplessness or excessive
-sleepiness. For, like fatigue, food may either bring or prevent sleep.
-
-In these days not even the most fastidious will object to a discussion
-of the ethics and æsthetics of feeding. It is no longer “the
-gratification of a vulgar necessity,” but a matter of keen scientific
-interest. Colleges give courses in the chemistry of food that we may
-know what combinations it is wise to make, while some of the leading
-universities have made severe practical tests of some of the new “fads
-in eating.” There are so many theories of eating to-day that one may
-take his choice, and, if the quality of both health and sleep is not
-improved, he can run through the list and then take what is best of
-each.
-
-When Dr. W. W. Hall wrote his book on fresh air in the sleeping-room,
-he added, in a casual sort of way, this piece of advice to the would-be
-sleeper, “Always eat slowly and in moderation of well-divided food.”
-That is advice that will bear infinite repetition. It is really the
-keynote of all the present-day theories of eating. It applies equally
-well to omnivorous and vegetarian peoples.
-
-Horace Fletcher says, “You may eat anything you like, if you eat it
-at the right time and in the right way,” and, when one has learned
-what Mr. Fletcher thinks is the right time and way, one has grasped
-the whole of “Fletcherism.” It consists in eating only when one is
-hungry—so hungry that “the mouth waters and one could stand and whinny
-like a horse at the smell of bread”—and then chewing just as long as
-there is any taste left to the food. I have known children to get
-the habit of eating too fast, with indigestion and restlessness as a
-consequence, because the nurse stood beside the table with a spoonful
-always ready and waiting while the last was being swallowed. We may
-avoid that habit for ourselves or cure ourselves of it by always laying
-down the knife and fork or spoon after each mouthful. This insures some
-time to chew.
-
-It is the opinion of all those who have special theories on “what to
-eat and how to eat it” that civilized man scarcely knows what true
-hunger is. We are so in the habit of eating at fixed and customary
-hours that we create “habit hunger,” which has but slight connection
-with Nature’s demands for sustenance. In accordance with this idea,
-fasting is again becoming popular and all sorts of good results are
-claimed for it. The “devil of unrest and disease” is now being
-reckoned among “those that go not out but by fasting and prayer.”
-Fasting and prayer meant the physical and the spiritual treatment
-together.
-
-Fasting has long been imposed upon man as a religious rite, generally
-as penance for some “sin,” but now it is being advised and
-self-imposed for the sake of its physical advantages. It may well be
-that the habit of fasting for health’s sake originated with prehistoric
-man and was diverted into religious channels and its original
-significance forgotten. So many “religious rites” have come about in
-this way that it is fair to assume that fasting may have, also.
-
-However that may be, the practice is coming into scientific prominence,
-and Charles C. Haskell in his book, “Perfect Health: How to Get it
-and How to Keep it, by One Who Has It,” made much of the importance of
-fasting. If one is ill, fasting will make him well, according to Mr.
-Haskell. He gives numerous instances of the benefits that have followed
-fasts extending from one to nine or even more days. Mr. Upton Sinclair
-has written of his happy experience of abstinence in “The Fasting
-Cure.” As soon as the system is ready for food, true hunger will
-appear, says Mr. Haskell, and, like Mr. Fletcher, he regards “watering
-at the mouth”—the free flow of saliva—as the best index of real hunger.
-
-But, unlike Fletcher, Haskell is a vegetarian pure and simple, as that
-word is generally understood. Haskell says, “Nature has provided
-a natural food for man, and it is the vegetable kingdom.” He also
-strongly urges upon the seeker for sound health, which means sound
-sleep, to give up the habit of taking breakfast, thus conquering
-appetite and restoring real hunger. This is, indeed, the first precept
-he lays down; and the second is much like it. It runs, “Never eat
-except at the call of Natural Hunger.” Third, “Enjoy to the full every
-mouthful of food as long as any taste remains in it.” Fourth, “Do
-not drink any liquids with your meals.” The rules are simple enough
-to follow if you have any cause to suspect that your mode of life is
-the cause of “poor sleep.” This book has no special brand of food to
-recommend, nor does it intend to say what any man should or should not
-eat. Sir Henry Thompson is about right when he says that “No man can
-tell another what he can or ought to eat, without knowing what are the
-habits of life and work—mental and bodily—of the person to be advised.
-One rule cannot apply to all.”
-
-All that the writer aims to do is to set forth the best theories of
-how to insure sound sleep and good health, and to leave it to the
-individual reader to try whichever he thinks fits. It is what he will
-do, anyway, if he is a wise man; for only by following the course he
-most desires can he learn whether these desires are to be trusted as
-guides to happiness and well-being.
-
-But—most persons eat too much or too often or too fast. Maybe you do,
-too.
-
-
-
-
-CHAPTER XXVI
-
-SOME MODERN THEORIES OF SLEEP
-
- I have an exposition of sleep come upon me.
-
- SHAKESPEARE.
-
-
-There have been almost as many theories of sleep and its causes as
-there have been investigators, but these theories may be grouped under
-a few main heads:
-
-Physiological, or that which has to do with some bodily conditions
-only, and which made men think that sleep was dependent upon the
-circulation of the blood or upon decreased consumption of oxygen, was
-an early one of these theories. It has had many advocates and has led
-to many interesting experiments that have increased the sum of general
-knowledge, although they have not explained sleep.
-
-Delicate instruments, with formidable names, have been invented
-and successfully used to measure the intensity of sleep and to
-note its phenomena. Two of the experimenters—C. E. Brush, Jr., and
-R. Fayerweather of the Physiological Laboratory of Johns Hopkins
-University—through long, intricate and exhaustive experiments, have
-found that sleep is most intense and the pressure of blood in the
-arteries lowest during the first half of the sleeping period. After we
-have completed the first half of our sleep, the intensity or soundness
-of sleep becomes less, and the pressure of blood in the arteries
-continues to increase up to the moment of awaking.
-
-It is interesting to learn that the moment when we are most soundly
-sleeping is at the end of the first hour of sleep, and that the
-blood-pressure has at that time reached its very lowest point. Messrs.
-Brush and Fayerweather report that, during the first few hours of
-sleep, the blood-pressure continues to fall and then begins a gradual
-rise. The tendency is to more and more rapid flow of the blood, but
-this rise is not steady or regular, because it is broken by long waves
-when the force of the circulation falls and the pulse is weaker than it
-was a moment or two before. The rapidity of the blood-flow is greater
-on the moment of awakening than just before dropping to sleep. This
-increase is not sudden, but is the culmination of the rise that begins
-a few hours after we fall asleep. (See Appendix B.)
-
-The intensity or depth of sleep is shown by a curve that looks like a
-pile of sand with the top scooped off. It increases rather slowly, in
-most cases, for the first quarter-hour: then quickly, so that half an
-hour later the person is most “sound asleep.” He stays so, on the
-level top, for about half an hour. That is the time that wise burglars
-and late husbands choose to steal into the house, about an hour after
-everyone is asleep. After that time the sleeper reverses the process of
-falling into deep sleep by getting nearer to waking for half an hour
-and then getting, at first rapidly, nearer to waking for two or three
-hours. In the last three or four hours healthy and normal persons reach
-about the same proportions of time and intensity of sleep, so that the
-Indian-bow-shaped curve fairly represents how long it takes everybody
-to deepen his sleep. Kohlschütter found how great an intensity of sound
-was needed to awaken a sleeper at different periods throughout the
-night. His curve thus made tallies very exactly with that of Brush and
-Fayerweather, obtained in quite a different way.
-
-Some other investigators have pointed out that, interesting as
-this theory is, it proves one thing about as completely as it does
-the other. For, while it is plain that sleep and the great fall in
-blood-pressure exist at the same moment, it is not conclusively shown
-which is cause and which is effect. Does sleep cause the fall in
-blood-pressure, or does the fall in blood-pressure cause sleep? The two
-are coexistent, but who can say which begins first?
-
-It looks as if sleep might be more justly considered the cause, if
-one takes the sleeping-position, and maintains the attitude of mind
-suitable to induce sleep, blood-pressure grows less, even though the
-patient does not actually fall asleep.
-
-Under this physiological view must come also the chemical theory based
-on the fact that we consume more oxygen during the day, thus forming
-carbon dioxide and other poisons which cause sleepiness. During the
-night we absorb oxygen, building up the tissues, and eliminating the
-poisons of the waking hours.
-
-The poisons which are the result of the consumption of oxygen cause
-fatigue, and according to Preyer, a European authority, “sleep is the
-direct consequence of fatigue, or rather of the fatigue products in
-the blood.” His contention is that, if lactic acid and other chemical
-products of the consumption of oxygen in the body were injected
-artificially, sleep would follow. Experiments in this direction made by
-Preyer, Fisher, and L. Meyer have yielded such contradictory results
-that the theory is not proved thereby.
-
-The idea that sleep is the result of poisons in the system takes us
-into the pathological theory of sleep, which regards it as a sort of
-disease like epilepsy or auto-intoxication. We produce by our own
-activities the poisons which cause insensibility until the system
-cleanses itself. Professor Leo Errera of Brussels says that “work in
-the organism is closely bound up with a chemical breaking down.” Among
-the products of this breakdown are “leucomaines,” the scientific
-name for poisons formed in living tissue, and just the opposite to
-“ptomaines,” which, however, are also virulent poisons.
-
-Professor Errera tells us that, during our waking hours, we produce
-more leucomaines than the oxygen we absorb can destroy. This excess is
-carried along by the blood and held by the brain centers, and in time
-produces sleep, just as any poisonous anæsthetic, such as morphine,
-would produce sleep.
-
-While we are sleeping we absorb much oxygen and we recover from the
-effects of our self-intoxication. Errera maintains that work, fatigue,
-sleep, and repair are not merely successive events, but phenomena
-chained together in a regular and necessary cycle. He explains
-sleeplessness due to overfatigue on the theory that small doses of
-poisons induce sleep and large doses induce excitement and even
-convulsions.
-
-Manacéïne points out that this theory is good from a purely physical
-standpoint, but does not explain our power to postpone sleep or the
-faculty of waking at a fixed hour. We can do both, and any adequate
-theory of sleep must explain why we can control the tendency to sleep,
-but cannot control the symptoms of ordinary poisoning.
-
-
-
-
-CHAPTER XXVII
-
-EARLY THEORIES OF SLEEP
-
- Balm that tames all anguish.
-
- WORDSWORTH.
-
-
-Mr. Edward Binns of London, as early as 1842, published a book called
-“The Anatomy of Sleep”—with the subtitle, “The Art of Procuring Sound
-and Refreshing Slumber at Will.” The subtitle makes one think of the
-three-volume novels of that time, but the book is fairly concise and
-worth careful review. Moreover, it is in advance of many works on sleep
-both before and after. (For ancient surmises see Appendix C.)
-
-One of the favorite medical theories of sleep is that it is caused by
-fatigue, and is, therefore, purely passive in its nature. Binns did not
-accept this theory. He said, “Sleep is an active and positive faculty,
-not a negative and passive result of fatigue or weariness.” Some of
-the more modern writers, notably Manacéïne, agree with Dr. Binns that
-sleep is not the result of physical fatigue or weariness. Dr. Binns
-thinks that one proof that fatigue can in no sense be said to be the
-cause of sleep is that, if we prolong “the state of wakefulness after
-the usual period of retiring to rest, it is more difficult to induce
-sleep than if we went at the usual hour.” This is especially true of
-children, yet the patient may be much more fatigued at the later hour
-than at the usual bedtime.
-
-Binns’ theory is that physiological sleep is in antagonism to
-intellectual activity, being the active process of nutrition,
-assimilation of food, or of the repair of the waste of the body; that
-it concerns the nerve centers: that is, “the ganglionic system.” It
-is a generally admitted theory that man’s activity, whether physical
-or mental, “uses up” tissue and nerve force, and that it is only when
-repair exceeds this waste that life is maintained at a high standard.
-If the activities of life be many and varied, much sleep according to
-this theory would be needed to repair the waste of force. Experience
-has shown that those who live purely physical lives, doing hard manual
-labor with little mental exercise, need the most sleep. Those whose
-activities are mostly mental generally sleep fewer hours, though the
-desire for sleep may be as intense when it comes as is that of the
-manual laborer. (See Appendix, Questionnaire.)
-
-Regarding sleep as a necessity, in itself an “active and positive
-faculty,” Binns says of it that “it is the true ‘vis medicatrix
-naturæ’ —the healing force of nature—to whose vigilance we are
-indebted for that condition of mind and body called ‘health.’” However,
-he is not an advocate of long hours of sleep for everybody. He thinks
-individuals differ widely in the amount of sleep needed. He makes the
-general statement that, “the lower the cerebral organs in the scale
-of organization, the greater the power of sleep.” On this point all
-the authorities agree, and even in our own experience we learn that.
-The animals nearest to man in point of development sleep more than man
-sleeps; and, among men, those who live the most sluggish mental and
-emotional lives sleep longer than those whose brains are more active.
-
-There may, of course, be exceptions to this rule, and yet those
-exceptions would not disprove that there is a rule. Much depends,
-says the good doctor, upon the peculiarities “of the individual; the
-culture of his mind; his amusement, his food, his occupation, and the
-temper with which he wooes sleep. General Elliot never slept more
-than four hours out of twenty-four, and his food consisted wholly of
-bread, vegetables, and water.” This seems like one more link in the
-chain that binds up our habits of eating with our power to sleep.
-Just as heavy eating late at night may so disturb our slumber as to
-leave us practically sleepless, so general heavy eating may render us
-so incapable of mental activity that sleep may take possession of
-us. General Elliot’s slight need of sleep was probably due, in large
-measure, to his light diet, and Dr. Binns seems to be of that opinion.
-We notice that flesh-eating animals, especially serpents, gorge and
-then sleep long.
-
-A modern medical authority, Sir Henry Thompson of London, in his
-book, “Diet in Relation to Age and Activity,” takes somewhat similar
-ground, although careful to state that he is not “a vegetarian.” He
-says: “I have been compelled by facts to accept the conclusion that
-as much mischief in the form of actual disease, impaired vigor and
-shortened life accrues to civilized man, so far as I have observed
-in our own country and throughout almost every part of Europe, from
-erroneous habits in eating as from the habitual use of alcoholic drink,
-considerable as I know the evil of that to be.” [9]
-
-[9] See chap. xxi on “Natural Living.”
-
-
-
-
-CHAPTER XXVIII
-
-MORE THEORIES
-
- To Sleep I give my powers away
- My will is bondsman to the dark;
- I sit within a helmless bark.
-
- TENNYSON.
-
-
-There is another class of investigators who aim to explain what might
-be called the nervous mechanism of sleep rather than its causes.
-These are the histologists, and theirs is the “histological” theory
-of sleep. There is a vast literature on this one phase of sleep
-theorizing alone, and it is deeply interesting to those who, in order
-to understand this theory, are willing to wrestle with the difficult
-and technical terms.
-
-The general reader, unfamiliar with physiological terms, is bewildered
-by such a word as “neuroglia.” He wonders what sort of a fossil that
-is, when in fact it is merely a particular sort of tissue found in
-the central nervous system; a substance without any nervous property
-serving a purpose merely similar to cement. So that, after all, like
-much science, it is simple enough when put in plain words.
-
-Some histologists hold that the neuroglia is able to contract or
-expand; that, when expanded, it takes or receives impressions from
-without, and, when it contracts, it shuts out such impressions, thus
-inducing sleep. Dr. J. Leonard Corning, of New York, says that
-“Sleep may be defined as that state of the central nervous system in
-which the higher centers are, to a great extent, in a condition of
-physiological quiescence, with all the consequences thereby implied.”
-Dr. Corning means that the nervous centers of the brain are inactive,
-as a result of contraction, and that this state results in drowsiness
-and in consequent loss of the consciousness. He recognizes, however,
-that this purely physical condition does not always produce sleep; that
-there may be disturbing causes within. He says: “Those who suffer from
-sleeplessness are, almost without exception, beset by a variety of
-disagreeable mental symptoms during the day, dread of impending evil,
-irritability, depression, dread of society, etc.” Although these are
-often the result of wrong states of mind or heart, he recommends for
-such cases warm baths, Turkish baths, massage, and for obstinate cases
-he even suggests the use of drugs, because he regards the formation
-of habits of insomnia as more likely than the formation of the drug
-habit. This suggestion is not generally favored by the investigators
-of sleep, the most of whom discountenance the use of drugs. Almost
-everyone has known somebody who contracted the “drug habit,” or has
-heard of somebody who died from the effects of an overdose of some
-poison taken to induce sleep. Nobody should dose himself with drugs,
-hoping to get good results from sleep thus secured. It is wiser by
-far to discover the cause of sleeplessness and remove it, rather than
-merely to stupefy ourselves for the time being.
-
-It was as a worker along histological lines that Henry Hubbard Foster
-of Cornell University became convinced that sleep is induced by the
-absence of stimuli: that is, of things that attract and hold our
-attention. It may be that the individual withdraws from all stimulating
-conditions and creates conditions to cause sleep, as we do when we
-prepare for bed; or it may be that, because of fatigue, our senses do
-not respond to the things that would otherwise stimulate us. In either
-event, the result is the same—there is an absence of stimuli.
-
-Foster believes that the present state of our development is not
-sufficient to meet the demands of continuous activity of the senses and
-the brain. “If it were not for fatigue,” he says, “the development of
-the nervous system might be carried to such a point that consciousness
-could be present continuously.” He finds the reason for sleep in “a
-temporary derangement of the nervous system.” According to Boris Sidis
-of Harvard, who has experimented extensively on frogs, cats, birds,
-dogs, children, and adults, the cells of the central nervous system, by
-expanding and contracting, connect themselves with, or cut themselves
-off from the whole nervous system, and induce “waking-states and
-sleeping-states.” The purely scientific man is forever aiming to
-reduce all the phenomena of human life to a simple formula. But no
-formula has yet been discovered which includes all phases of life to
-the satisfaction of all its students. Hence we have so many different
-theories of so natural and universal a function as sleep, none of them
-perfectly satisfactory even to their discoverers or inventors, and none
-affording any great help to those who want to know how to sleep.
-
-This whole neuron theory, as it is called, of dilating and contracting
-is really no more complete an explanation than any of the others. No
-perfect explanation of any natural function can be given until we can
-fully explain life. That has not yet been done. The most advanced
-biologists can say, “Here life appears,” but they cannot absolutely
-define life any more than they can create it out of inanimate things.
-
-We know, however, that in sleep, sight, nearly useless to man in the
-gloom of night, goes first to rest. Next taste goes. Then smell, still
-so useful to animals, deserts us. Then touch is dulled. Last of all,
-the hearing relaxes its guard, though with some persons it stays long
-awake. Noise will arouse us quicker than a touch; and last the light.
-
-As you drop off to sleep you can notice the decreased sensation in the
-long-serving feet which feels as if it slowly climbs to the muscles in
-the head and neck.
-
-
-
-
-CHAPTER XXIX
-
-STILL MORE THEORIES
-
- Sleep sits upon his brow;
- His eye is closed; he sleeps, nor dreams of harm.
-
- LONGFELLOW.
-
-
-We have not yet exhausted all the theories, nor shown how much too much
-some of them and how far too little all of them prove.
-
-The two remaining scientific theories of sleep are the psychological
-and the biological. The best modern exponent of the psychological
-theory is Marie de Manacéïne, who defines sleep as “the resting-time
-of consciousness.” Persons whose consciousness is but little developed,
-young children, and those of weak intellect, usually require a great
-deal of sleep, while persons whose minds are active, alert, responsive,
-get along with comparatively little sleep.
-
-For a long time it was believed that living creatures devoid of
-consciousness would not sleep at all, but recent experiments have
-apparently weakened that conclusion. Dogs, pigeons, and other animals
-deprived of brains in the interest of scientific discovery, appear to
-sleep, that is, they have periods of inactivity, just as those with
-brains and consciousness. Belmondo, after repeated experiments, drew
-the conclusion that sleep is not a purely cerebral function, as some
-believe, but that the whole organism sleeps; and the brain sleeps only
-because the organs of sense sleep. This, however, is doubtful.
-
-And this is in sum and substance the biological theory of sleep,
-that the whole organism sleeps, but even here there are exceptions.
-It is true that the heart beats less rapidly; that we breathe less
-frequently; that the brain cells cease their functioning because the
-neuroglia contracts and shuts off or lessens their joint activity;
-the motor consciousness rests; the nerves of sensation refuse to be
-stimulated, we sleep. Yet we know that the spinal cord never sleeps,
-that certain functions of the body continue uninterruptedly in the
-sleeping-state as in the waking-state, and, after all these years of
-theorizing and experimenting, we do not know definitely what sleep is.
-We know the mechanism of sleep, its manifestations and its effects;
-we know that continued sleeplessness means madness and death; that
-sleep is essential to the physical and mental well-being of the human
-organism, but we do not know what sleep is any more than we know what
-life is. There is a limit to what material science can know.
-
-Heubel, who is one of the recent supporters of the psychological
-theory of sleep, says that “Mental activity depends on the incoming
-peripheral sensory stimulations; when such peripheral sensory
-stimulations are absent, mental activity is in abeyance and sleep
-results.” This is, in effect, to say that, when things about us no
-longer give us any sensation, when they do not attract or hold our
-attention, we fall asleep. But we all know of exceptions to this rule.
-We have seen others fall into “a brown study,” and have probably done
-so ourselves, and become perfectly lost to all about them; absorbed in
-their own reflections, they neither hear nor see the things happening
-around them. For the time being “peripheral sensory stimulations” are
-absent, and yet mental activity continues and sleep does not result.
-
-The biological theory of sleep considers all the other theories, while
-formulating its own, because biology considers the whole organism and
-not only one organ or function of the body. From a different point of
-view Binns’ theory is confirmed by Claperède, who points out that,
-“biologically regarded, sleep has its significance not as a passive
-state, but as an active instinct, like all the other instincts of
-animal life.” There is a degree of satisfaction to be found in this
-theory. It might be stated in this way, that, when man has had during
-any period all the sensations and experiences he can digest, the
-instinct to sleep takes possession of him. It is not that he becomes
-helpless in the hands of those experiences, but that his whole nature,
-like his stomach, knows when it has had food enough, and desires time
-for digestion and assimilation before it takes in more. Obviously,
-“utter separation from the phenomenal world,” as John Bigelow expresses
-it, becomes necessary.
-
-In his lectures on Botany at the Royal School of Medicine in Great
-Britain, Professor Leo H. Grindon said: “Man is captured in sleep not
-by death but by his better nature; to-day runs in through a deeper day
-to become the parent of to-morrow, and to issue every morning, bright
-as the morning of life, and of life-size, from the peaceful womb of
-the cerebellum.” This is the result not of a passive state, but of an
-active instinct; it accepts sleep as a time of growth, not merely a
-time of rest. Bigelow says, “Something goes on during sleep which is
-a preventive as well as an antidote to mania,” and, in furtherance of
-this same idea, Dr. J. J. G. Wilkinson of the Royal College of Surgeons
-of London, argues that it seems “as if a reason more perfect than
-reason, and uninfluenced by its partialities, had been at work when
-we were in our beds.” Even “biologically regarded,” Bigelow is not
-far astray when he claims that “our desire for sleep is manifestly
-designed to promote in us the growth and development of spiritual
-graces.” In other words, we desire to sleep, that we may relate the
-experiences of our every-day active life to the sum of knowledge we
-already possess by inheritance and past experience, that we may thereby
-get a fuller understanding of life and its purposes.
-
-“It is not uncommon for those who have no habit or inclination
-to sleep during the morning hours of secular days, to be overcome
-with somnolency in church soon after the devotional exercises are
-begun, and to find it impossible to derive any edification from them
-until they have lost themselves for a moment or two in absolute
-unconsciousness. Then they have no difficulty, sometimes a lively
-pleasure, in attending to the exercises which follow. The worshiper is
-then withdrawn from the familiar excitement of customary avocations.
-It is idle to suppose that in these few moments of repose, upright
-in his pew, he has rested enough, in the common acceptation of that
-word, to repair any waste of tissue that would explain the new sense
-of refreshment that ensues. He has received, in that brief retirement
-from the world, some reinforcements which manifestly are not dependent
-upon time or space for their efficacy—spiritual reinforcements, and
-spiritual reinforcements only. He has removed himself, or been removed,
-further away, out of sight or hearing or thinking, so to speak, of
-his phenomenal life, and nearer to the Source of all life.” This
-explanation may or may not be true. He adds:
-
-“It was quite a common impression among the ancients that sleepers
-in temples of religion were more apt to receive divine communications
-there than elsewhere.” (“Mystery of Sleep,” John Bigelow, pp. 94-95.)
-
-
-
-
-CHAPTER XXX
-
-WE LEARN TO DO BY DOING
-
- Sleep winds us up for the succeeding dawn.
-
- YOUNG.
-
-
-Good health and good sleep are so interdependent that it is as
-difficult to separate them into cause and effect as to determine
-“which came first, the hen or the egg?” If it be true that life may be
-wonderfully prolonged as soon as we have learned to avoid disease and
-exhaustion, and that we may learn to avoid both by avoiding excess,
-then it is as much within our power to live long and well as to sleep
-long and well, if we so wish. Senility, the disease of old age, is now
-believed to be caused by germs which flourish in the waste matter left
-in the system through improper or excessive eating.
-
-Metchnikoff, the noted bacteriologist, alleges that the large intestine
-is the breeding-place of these destructive germs. A Dr. Hall arrived
-at the same conclusion earlier and combated his germs with copious
-water-flooding of the bowels. So far, Metchnikoff’s experiments point
-to the conclusion that lactic acid destroys them. That is why he
-recommends the use of pure buttermilk and has invented a tablet that,
-dropped into milk, will convert it into a wholesome drink for adult
-man. Discoveries and inventions of this sort are of great interest to
-all who enjoy and seek to prolong life. But purely physical things
-cannot take the place of the mental attitude. The youngest woman of
-seventy-nine that I have ever known is one who says, “Tell me more;
-I must not get into such a rut that I cannot grow.” No discovery or
-invention will do us much good if we allow habit to cramp our thought
-and custom to stale it.
-
-Science may show us how to avoid disease and to prolong life, but, if
-we turn a deaf ear to her teaching, we shall get no benefit from it. It
-is the alert, open mind that profits from discovery or experience. The
-sun may shine with life-giving power, but, if the house be shuttered
-and darkened, it will not benefit the dwellers. So with the mind. If
-we resolutely shut it against new ideas, if we refuse to take even the
-gift of life and health from an unaccustomed hand, then we must expect
-to suffer.
-
-If we would rid ourselves of sleeplessness, of disease, and
-dissatisfaction, we must be willing to let go of every habit, every
-thought, every feeling that may injure us. To hug them to us is merely
-to invite further suffering, to lessen our own vigor and our own
-enjoyment.
-
-Nevertheless, we must hug our habits to us, if we can see or understand
-nothing better. No one can help us beyond what we are willing to
-receive: anyone can lead a horse to the water, but no one can make him
-drink. If the end in view seems to us worth the price we must pay, we
-pay it. We have no choice; for our desires push us that way. We often
-take credit to ourselves for things for which no credit is due us.
-However self-denying an act may seem, it is, after all, the thing we
-want most to do, else we would not do it.
-
-In the same way, if we refuse to profit by the discoveries and
-experiments of others, if we prefer to go on in our old way of
-suffering, nobody can really prevent us. It is all a matter that we
-must decide. This book does not pretend to cure any ill. It intends
-merely to show what investigation and experience have proved; to point
-to possible ways of escape from the ills with which men now suffer. If
-it looks desirable to you, you will only read it; but, until you have
-tried it, you cannot say whether it is good or not.
-
-
-
-
-CHAPTER XXXI
-
-VAIN REGRETS
-
- Thou hast been called, O Sleep! the friend of woe;
- But ’tis the happy that have called thee so.
-
- SOUTHEY.
-
-
-Sometimes we lie awake at night to regret some action of our own
-because the result has not been what we desired or expected. “John the
-Unafraid” says that “if your misfortune is not your own fault, you
-have much to be glad of. If it is your own fault you have more to be
-glad of, since you can prevent that misfortune from occurring again.”
-In either case, therefore, you may follow the advice given so many
-years ago, “Rejoice evermore.” At least it is evident that in neither
-case need you lose sleep over it: for, according to your light, you did
-what seemed to you at the time best for you to do.
-
-For, to quote Epictetus again, it is not possible “to judge one thing
-to be best for me and seek another.” The thing you did, you did because
-it seemed best to do that, and to regret now and wish you had done
-something else is, in reality, to wish that you had been a different
-person from what you were, which is a foolish regret, or, that you had
-done something different from what seemed best to do. That would be a
-mild form of insanity. You don’t really regret that you were not insane?
-
-It has no bearing on the case that the outcome has proved that you
-were mistaken. You might never have learned that your course was not
-best for you or for others, except by doing just as you did. Now you
-have that much more knowledge than you had before, and you can use it
-to help you another time. A man can’t do any better than he can. You
-cannot do more than you _know_, and you only know what you have learned
-by experience. The great majority of us learn only in the school of
-personal experience; the few wise ones learn some things through the
-experience of others, by relating or applying their own experience to
-the events in the lives of others. Comparing and reflecting, they come
-to see the close relation of act and consequence, and thus recognize
-the universal laws in operation.
-
-Such wisdom may be yours, but it will not come through regretting that
-you did not possess it ready-made. Besides, no misfortune, whether we
-are ourselves directly responsible for it or not, is ever in vain.
-No matter how hard and almost unendurable the “misfortune” may have
-seemed at the time, we shall find in looking back that it was no
-unmixed evil. The terrible calamity has often been the turning-point
-in our lives. It made us pause and think, and, through the thinking, we
-have achieved development of which we were otherwise incapable.
-
-Even when we do not always see this for ourselves, partly because we
-are not always good judges of our own development or progress, we see
-it plainly in the lives of others. A friend of mine once said to me of
-a woman who was doing a tremendous work in the world, “I remember when
-she was just a selfish society woman.” “What changed her?” I asked.
-
-“Oh, she lost her only daughter very suddenly. It was a terrible blow,
-and her friends thought she would never recover. But she did, and those
-who love her best know that that heavy sorrow was really a blessing
-in disguise. Think what she is now!” I smiled appreciatively, for my
-friend was herself still smarting from a keen disappointment which she
-had not yet recognized as a blessing in disguise. But recognizing it in
-another’s life must eventually help her to see it in her own.
-
-If our misfortune has come from a selfishness that we might have
-overcome, and did not, we shall not better matters by wasting time
-in regret. “Repentance”—which is the only emotion such a misfortune
-should arouse—“is to up and act for righteousness, and forget that
-you ever had relations with sin.” Unless we “bring forth fruits meet
-for repentance,” our repentance is lost, and we are indeed worse off
-than if we had felt none.
-
-Spinoza, the Jewish philosopher, has spoken almost the last word on the
-uselessness of regret. He says: “One might perhaps expect gnawings
-of conscience and repentance to help to bring him on the right path,
-and might thereupon conclude (as everyone does conclude) that these
-affections are good things. Yet when we look at the matter closely, we
-shall find that not only are they not good, but on the contrary hurtful
-and evil passions. For it is manifest that we can always get along
-better by reason and love of truth than by worry of conscience and
-remorse.” It is an old Hebrew idea that we should repent in sackcloth
-and ashes, making ourselves miserable that we may make God happy.
-We forget that love cannot enjoy anyone’s misery. It were indeed a
-perverted mind, whether human or divine, that could derive pleasure
-from the discomfort or sorrow of another.
-
-Plants grow better when the sunshine warms them, and human beings
-expand and develop under the sunshine of joyous reflection and effort.
-If you are losing sleep through dreary or hopeless regret, purge your
-mind of such folly, and, after a sound sleep, you will find that things
-look brighter.
-
-There are, of course, exceptions to the rule that sleep brings mental
-quiet, for some sorts of nervous sufferers are prone to depression in
-the morning, but it is not common among active, healthy persons. They,
-like well-nourished children, awake to find each day a fresh delight.
-
-Dr. M. Allen Starr, the distinguished nerve specialist of New York,
-writes me that there are several explanations of the cause of such
-depression. He is of the opinion that those who are depressed from
-melancholia when they wake in the morning, are probably suffering
-from a toxic condition of the blood which originally produced the
-melancholia. This toxin, or poison, is resisted by the nervous system
-when it is well nourished, but has a greater effect when the nervous
-system is poorly nourished. He says that there is a general consensus
-of opinion that, during sleep, the blood vessels of the brain are
-contracted slightly so that the amount of blood going into the brain
-during sleep is less than during the waking hours. This was proved
-many years ago by Professor Mosso of Turin, by a series of experiments
-which are conclusive. When blood vessels are contracted, and less blood
-is going to an organ, the nutrition of that organ is less actively
-maintained. Hence, if a person has poison in the system, it is less
-restricted during sleep, has a greater opportunity to attack the
-nerve-cells, and thus to prevent the nutrition which is essential
-to the feeling of general comfort. That is the theory on which we
-physicians explain depression on awaking after sleep in melancholia.
-What is true of melancholia is probably true also of fatigue conditions
-and irregular conditions of health, many of which are dependent upon
-the existence in the blood of substances detrimental to health, either
-the products of indigestion or the poisons of disease. This theory
-explains the conditions in which a person not actively ill may awake
-from a sleep in a state of depression. (See Appendix A.)
-
-Prof. Edward M. Weyer in reading the sheets of this book suggests
-another tentative explanation of depression upon waking: if we consider
-the nerve cell as stored with energy, then, if the store is maintained
-at normal, it is in a healthful state. The supply fluctuates somewhat
-during the day, but in the melancholic person it does not rise to
-normal even after good sleep: the less amount of carbonic acid gas
-eliminated during sleep leaves the system on waking at the mercy of
-that poisoned gas and of the chronically low nervous energy.
-
-
-
-
-CHAPTER XXXII
-
-THE LOVE THAT IS PEACE
-
- Sweet gate of life, sweet type of death—
- Come, Sleep!
-
- DORA READ GOODALE.
-
-
-Many persons lose sleep because of their love for others, as the lover
-who sighs and tosses, dreaming, asleep or awake, of the beloved. The
-mother loses sleep thinking of the child with its little worries and
-problems, its willfulness or its frail health. There is always some
-cause that seems to her reasonable ground for worry. The father, too,
-plans for the future of his son, and lies awake to map out a life for
-another human being, as if that being were a puppet and his father held
-the strings by which it could be moved in his hands.
-
-Dickens showed the futility of such planning in “Dombey and Son,” and
-we have all seen it in actual life. Yet we go on doing as our fathers
-did, and suffering, as we say, “because of our love.” It is really
-only because we do not understand what love is.
-
-What we usually call love is largely self-love; that is why we hear so
-much of the pangs of love. Love, being the essence of godlikeness,
-ought to bring us the joy of the gods, and love would bring only joy if
-we could forget ourselves. We understand ourselves so little that we do
-not know when our love is self-love. We are always seeking some return
-upon our affection, as if it were an investment that must pay dividends
-to prove its profitableness. The price of our love is generally the
-right to criticise, to influence, to control; or, if we forego these
-seeming advantages, we expect at least consideration from those whom
-we have blessed with our love. No relation of life seems too sacred to
-escape the contamination of the selfish demands of self or narrow love.
-
-The mother loves her child, cares for it in its helpless years, gladly
-risks even her life for it, and yet may be unwilling that that child
-shall live its own life, follow its own yearnings, think its own
-thoughts. The great stumbling-block of the parent is the unconscious
-demand for gratitude, the claim made upon the child of a return for the
-effort and affection so freely bestowed. It may be that the parent does
-not look for material returns, such as money or position, nevertheless
-a price is exacted every time that the parent is surprised,
-disappointed, or angered by the child pursuing some course contrary to
-his teaching. The love that cared for the helpless child becomes the
-tyranny that would control its thoughts and action.
-
-We say “This is natural,” but we seldom say, even to ourselves,
-“This is selfishness.” We would not desire to compel another to think
-as we think, if we were not sure that we could not be mistaken. It is
-a conceit of ourselves which makes us quick to thrust upon another
-“ready-made” opinions because they are our opinions.
-
-But there is a still more subtle selfishness than this that may be at
-the bottom of things. If we have earnestly advocated anything which the
-world has been slow to accept, we feel that it is a sort of attack upon
-us and our views when our children do not support those views. We say,
-“How can we expect others to heed us, if our own children don’t heed
-us,” and so we are hurt or angered. We think of their opposition as
-disloyalty, and it does not occur to us that it might be no advantage
-if others did heed us; that the very opposition of our children may be
-the best means of preventing us from doing harm to our fellows.
-
-Besides, if we cared more that men should see the right and love it,
-than that they should heed us, it would not hurt or vex us whether
-they listened or not. If we have a message, it will find hearers and
-followers. “There can never be one lost good,” says Browning, and, if
-what we would teach is good, it will find its own. It is self-love,
-not love for others, which makes us sore or angry when they will not
-listen.
-
-It is a narrow love that makes us fail our friends because they have
-not fulfilled the ideal we had of them. We never really loved them. We
-loved something that we thought they should be, and were unwilling to
-find them something different. We get pain out of our relations with
-our fellow-beings because our love is not big enough to exclude self.
-
-We make in our minds a model of what our friends should be, and it
-takes up so much room that we cannot accommodate so much as a mental
-photograph of what they really are. And just there lies not only the
-possibility but the absolute assurance of “disappointment” in them,
-and consequent “pain” for ourselves.
-
-If we knew our friends for what they really are, and were willing that
-they should be themselves, we could not possibly be disappointed in
-them. We really insist upon our friends being in “our own image and
-likeness.” Just so the Hebrews, in the efforts to present God to the
-world, made of him simply a man like themselves—big and strong, to be
-sure, with sentiments of love and pity and justice, but with a lust of
-anger and revenge which almost blotted out his tenderness. Many people
-still cling to this idea of God, but they are mostly those whose love
-is so full of self that even the Supreme Being must conform to their
-standard or they cease to believe in him.
-
-The “disappointment” that so often follows marriage, even between
-the fondest lovers, is mainly caused by this narrow or self-love. Most
-married misery is due to each trying to improve the other instead of
-himself. “Because I love him,” says the wife, “he should do as I ask
-him, but he refuses. He does not love me as I love him. I am almost
-broken-hearted with disappointment.” “Any wife who loved her husband
-would find it a pleasure to be and to do what he asks. My wife does not
-conform to my wishes, but insists upon doing as she herself prefers.
-If a man is not the head of his own house, how is happiness possible?
-Marriage is indeed a lottery, and I have drawn a blank,” says he.
-
-But there is one thing certain, if we find ourselves suffering through
-our love in any relation of life, whether as husband or wife, mother,
-daughter, lover, friend, we may be sure that it is because our love is
-not broad enough; because we believe in ownership, or desire gratitude,
-or are confident of our wisdom and ability to control the life of
-another. In short, that we love self best. “Love suffereth long and
-is kind; ... seeketh not her own, is not easily provoked, thinketh no
-evil.” The largest love embraces, understands, and forgives everything,
-and knows no disappointments and no end.
-
-
-
-
-CHAPTER XXXIII
-
-THE SPECTER OF DEATH
-
-
-Often we are anxious and sleepless only because we are afraid of what
-is not in itself frightful. Like the little child in the picture who
-mounts the dark stairs in deadly terror of an imaginary bear, we are
-afraid lest we should see a vague something that might terrify us still
-more.
-
-But perhaps there is a real specter in our path? Let us attack the most
-terrible foe; having overcome him, we shall find that the lesser ones
-have no power over us.
-
-A man was once walking alone a lonely road on a dark, misty night,
-fearing every sound and looking for danger. He had been told that the
-road was haunted and this was the terror that possessed him. As he
-neared the haunted spot, he saw a white form rise from the earth. It
-was barely discernible through the mist as it waved thin arms and made
-soft moaning sighs. His hair rose on his head, but his going forward
-was imperative, so he took heart of grace, and determined to face his
-adversary.
-
-“Spirit or human,” said he, “I shall settle you before I leave this
-place to-night.” With this he dashed forward, and found that it was
-merely a slender birch with white under-leaves upturned in the wind, as
-the breeze sighed through its branches.
-
-The rest of the road held no terrors for him. The specter he had most
-dreaded proved to be nothing at all. In conquering his first emotion of
-fear he had vanquished all terror.
-
-Maybe we fear the possible death either of ourselves or of some other
-dearer than ourselves. Are we afraid of that? Let us look calmly at it.
-Changes have taken place, and are even now in progress in our bodies,
-yet we do not fear them. For the most part we are even unconscious of
-them: a change is not terrible in itself, no matter how great it is.
-Death is but another change, one that has not yet come.
-
-A pious man once appealed in distress to the late Rev. Dr. John Hall:
-he said he knew his soul was saved, but he was afraid of dying. Dr.
-Hall asked him, “But you are not dying now, are you?” “No,” he
-said, “but I know that I must die some day.” “Ah, well!” replied
-the doctor, “we hardly need dying grace until our dying day.” “As
-our day so shall our strength be”—the bravest soldier may be nervous
-contemplating the battle, but in the action he finds not only courage
-but exhilaration. So, if we learn to live from day to day, we may well
-put off fear of death or dying until our dying day has come, and then
-we may find that there is nothing to fear. For the present, what we
-have to consider is life, and what it may mean.
-
-There are two ways of looking at life: one regards life as the changes
-that take place in the body from birth to death. The body is always
-changing, being almost all renewed at least every seven years. Old hair
-is constantly falling out, to be replaced by new; we cut the excess
-growth of the nails, and rarely stop to think that the nails we have
-to-day are not the same nails we had a few weeks or months ago. We get
-rid of dead skin, and our skin constantly renews itself, and so we feel
-no worry if we cut or scratch it. We say quite complacently, “Oh! it
-will heal up and new skin grow.” The whole body fades and is renewed.
-It is not, then, the changes in the body that we fear.
-
-We accept this series of physical changes as physical life, for we
-know that, if the changes stopped, life would stop also; but we must
-also recognize them as death, for the beginning of each new stage
-is the death of the previous stage. Thus death is steadily going on
-in ourselves, at the same time that life continues, and we not only
-have no fear of it, but are unconscious of the process: our body is
-constantly passing from death to life, as well as from life to death,
-and we are not afraid of that; in fact, we never give a thought to it.
-
-Even from the physical standpoint man need not spend his best years
-fearing death. When we live so that death shall round out a long life,
-we shall have lost all fear of it. When we say that a person did not
-die a “natural death” we usually mean that he died suddenly and
-violently. But death from disease is not “natural” either, and in as
-far as we learn how to live aright, harmonizing the physical, mental,
-and spiritual natures, realizing that the perishing body is not all of
-us, we can avoid most of the fruitful sources of disease. As we learn
-what true life is, and how natural the eventual dissolution of the body
-is, we shall cease to tremble at it.
-
-Metchnikoff, the eminent philosopher and student who has devoted years
-of study and research to the life and death of man, says: “When
-diseases are suppressed, and the course of life regulated by scientific
-hygiene, it is probable that death will come only at extreme old age.
-When death comes in its natural place at the end of the normal cycle of
-the physical life, it will be robbed of its terrors, and be accepted
-gratefully as any other part of the cycle of life.” He thinks, in fact,
-that the instinct of life may be replaced by an instinct of death.
-“It is even possible,” he says, “that the approach of natural death
-is one of the most pleasant sensations in the world.” Perhaps the most
-striking evidence of the truth of this so far recorded is the case of
-Brillat-Savarin’s aunt—who, at ninety-three, said to her famous nephew,
-“If you ever reach my age you will find that one wants to die just
-as one wants to sleep.” All of us know of cases where the very aged,
-having lived their lives to the best of their perceptions, awaited
-death willingly and almost joyfully. As Browning says, “Thou waitedst
-age; wait death, nor be afraid.” Fear of the approach of death disturbs
-us because we feel further possibilities of life. We do not want to
-be cut off in the flower of our existence; we think of death, not as
-a change of existence, but as the end of it, and we think there is no
-sure way of avoiding that. All of us have felt the truth of Dickens’
-idea of the bells which toll almost gladly for the aged, but seem to
-weep when the young die. We are sure we should not fear death, nor be
-unwilling to die if we had the privilege of living to a “ripe old
-age.” For time is not measured by the clock or by the calendar; those
-measure only the revolutions of the earth and of the sun. Time is
-measured by thought and act, and, more than all, by feeling. And we can
-ordinarily prolong our own lives to the time when we shall willingly
-and gladly lay them down.
-
-This willingness is by no means the same feeling that prompts the
-useless and unmeaning exclamation, “Oh, I wish I were dead!” The
-average person gets into such an unreasoning state over every little
-happening that he cannot see any connection between the events in his
-daily life. He becomes discouraged, and thinks for the moment that he
-would like to quit it all. No matter how many years such an one has
-lived, he has not attained a “ripe old age.” Ripeness has no part
-in petty impatience; it implies mellowness, soundness, and general
-wholesomeness of character.
-
-As man is learning more and more about his life, he is finding that
-sickness, premature old age, and untimely death are, in a large
-measure, due to his own misunderstanding of the purposes of life. It is
-this misunderstanding that gives the mysterious air to life. We fear
-the mysterious, for our ingrained habit of regarding things that we do
-not yet understand as insoluble mysteries is a relic of the days when
-savage man found mystery and danger in everything.
-
-So, if we are making ourselves unhappy, losing sleep, and suffering
-physical and mental distress because of the possible approach of death,
-we may dismiss that cause of worry. As soon as we begin to consider the
-purposes of life and our relation to them, we shall naturally avoid
-excesses in eating; live as hygienically as possible; harbor cleanly,
-uplifting thoughts, helpful to others and to ourselves, and so reach
-out spiritually for a fuller understanding of the purposes of all life.
-And what we cease to fear for ourselves, we soon cease to fear for our
-other selves.
-
-Living thus, we shall not fear death, but shall move toward it without
-thinking of it, knowing that it is natural, merely the long sleep of
-the objective consciousness.
-
-
- Sleep till the end, true soul and sweet!
- Nothing comes to thee new or strange.
- Sleep full of rest from head to feet;
- Lie still, dry dust, secure of change.
-
- TENNYSON.
-
- O’er each vain eye oblivious pinions wave,
- And quench’d existence crouches in a grave.
- What better name may Slumber’s bed become?
- Night’s Sepulcher, the universal Home,
- Where Weakness, Strength, Vice, Virtue, sunk supine,
- Alike in naked helplessness recline;
- Glad for a while to heave unconscious breath,
- Yet wake to wrestle with the dread of death,
- And shun, though day but dawns on ills increased,
- That Sleep, the loveliest, since it dreams the least.
-
- BYRON.
-
-
-
-
-CHAPTER XXXIV
-
-A NATURAL CHANGE
-
-
-Through generations, perhaps for hundreds of thousands of years, custom
-has ordained grief for the dead, we have come to feel that it is a
-proof of affection or of sensitiveness or a sort of virtue: we indulge
-in the luxury of woe, we nurse our grief until, like a spoiled lap-dog,
-it becomes a burden. But we know that the unselfish dead would only be
-distressed at our grieving.
-
-When we look upon the change called death as no more mysterious than
-any of the other changes in our bodily or mental development, which we
-either welcome or are unconscious of, we shall lose our terror of it
-either for ourselves or for others.
-
-Our terror for others is not really for those others so much as
-for ourselves. The sense of “our great loss” is really a piece of
-selfishness. For life cannot mean one thing for us and another for our
-brother; as we see our own lives, so must we see the lives of those we
-love. The purposes of life are the same for all men, for all men are in
-the plan of the Spirit.
-
-If for any reason our brother has passed from our earthly cognizance,
-we cannot say that we have really lost him. It is true that we do
-not see him with our eyes or touch him with our hands, but we have a
-remembrance of him in the form of a mental picture down to the minutest
-details of how he looked and moved, and we also have a remembrance of
-his spiritual character.
-
-For the character—that sum of the abilities of those we love—remains
-with us after the physical form has passed away. We are affected by it
-just as we were when the loved one lived. We can feel the appeal that
-that character makes to us, its effect upon our thoughts and actions,
-as strongly as if the absent one stood beside us and claimed our
-attention. How, then, can we say he is lost?
-
-The dead whom we have loved hold us as securely as they did when they
-were living; it is only that we do not see how. It has come within the
-experience of many that the death of father, mother, or some dearly
-loved one has led to the awakening of some wayward or misguided one who
-seemed to be wasting all the opportunities of life. We know that it
-was not the mere death which worked this seeming miracle. That simply
-woke the dormant love in the one who had hitherto desired only his own
-way. As soon as he became conscious of his love for the beloved one who
-has passed out of his earthly life, he longed to be what his beloved
-would have had him be, and so he turned his attention to using the
-opportunities of life, to the end that he might grow and develop. Thus
-in death the loved one held the wayward friend even more securely than
-he ever had in life.
-
-We shall not fear death, even for those we love, when we have realized
-that it is but a passing from life to life—just as the falling leaves
-do not mean the annihilation of the life of the tree, but merely the
-end of one phase of that life. Somewhere, some time, that which was
-really our loved one will blossom again in the world’s experience,
-and even now is continuing to live through its influence upon our
-lives. “There is no death; what seems so is transition.” The bodily
-companionship with all that it implies, that we have lost: yet, if our
-beloved had gone to be Viceroy of India, we should miss him, but we
-should not put on mourning for that, nor “grieve” that we had lost his
-companionship.
-
-“But we could write and hear from him and so keep in touch with him.”
-True: it is then for your own loss that you mourn.
-
-Nearly all the suffering that death causes us is for ourselves. It
-is our feeling of helplessness, the emptiness of the earth that is
-left, the changed world that we look at in the sleepless hours of the
-night, or, when we awake in the morning, our pity for our own loss
-and the seeming uselessness of what remains of our existence. This
-consciousness of our loss numbs us so that we cannot get a realizing
-sense of the joys of the spirit set free from the limitations of the
-body. Our love is still so earthy that it demands fleshly as well as
-spiritual communion.
-
-So real is our suffering when those we love best are torn from us that
-for a time we are inconsolable. Philosophy, religion, the affectionate
-ministrations of those about us, avail not to bind up the broken heart.
-There is but one cure for such grief—to minister to others. Unselfish
-devotion to a great cause—the cause of our fellows, whether in the mass
-or individually—is a sovereign balm for a bleeding heart.
-
-When we understand life we know this, for we have learned that neither
-in joy nor in sorrow can any man live to himself. Action of any sort
-relieves tension and suffering. If we bottle up all our sympathy for
-ourselves, it becomes so tainted with selfishness and narrowness that
-it loses its healing qualities. But if we let that sympathy go out
-freely to others, forgetting our “personal” needs, it blesses them and
-blesses us.
-
-A friend of mine lost a son and daughter by drowning, just as they
-had entered young manhood and womanhood, and for a time his grief
-threatened to crush him. He found no relief until he had his attention
-called to the sorrow of another who, through a train wreck, had lost
-his only child. Although a stranger to this stricken father, he sought
-him out and, because of his own double loss, was able to comfort him
-as no one else could. Moreover, the restlessness went out of his own
-heart; he realized his kinship with all sufferers as never before.
-
-There is a story in “The Light of Asia” that Buddha, to comfort a
-mother broken-hearted over the death of her only child, sent her to get
-black mustard seed from a house where death had never been. The mother
-carried her dead babe about the village, and in each house she was
-offered mustard seed, but each giver said, “Death has been here.” At
-last she realized that she was not the only sufferer, that death was a
-necessary accompaniment of life as shadow is a necessary accompaniment
-of light. Her grief, she saw, was but a part of the common sorrow. The
-recognition that either joy or sorrow is common to all increases the
-healing sense of unity, it is a “touch of nature” that “makes the
-whole world kin.” There is no wrong in our grieving, if it comforts us:
-but to look thus each for himself dispassionately at the cause and the
-nature of his grief, will surely give so clear a view of it that it
-will no longer deprive us of sleep.
-
-Then why lose sleep worrying about what we know to be merely a change?
-
-
-
-
-CHAPTER XXXV
-
-THE DISTRUST OF LIFE
-
- Come Sleep, O Sleep! the certain knot of peace,
- The baiting-place of wit, the balm of woe:
- The poor man’s wealth, the prisoner’s release,
- Th’ indifferent judge between the high and low.
-
- SIR PHILIP SIDNEY.
-
-
-If there is no cause to fear death, even when one views life as purely
-physical, there is still less cause to fear it when one holds the
-second possible view of what life is—the view that life is the Unseen
-Consciousness and is within one’s self. These are two opposing views;
-it is only when we try to combine them that we find ourselves filled
-with fears. When we reason about our bodily life, thinking of ourselves
-as animals, and apply the conclusions to our lives as men, we find
-confusion, uncertainty, and fear: for our minds reach conclusions that
-our hearts tell us cannot be true.
-
-What man fears is not death—_as an animal_ he does not know or see
-death. As long as a man is mainly animal he suffers only as an animal.
-The deer that flees before the dogs is not afraid of death, for it is
-not possible that it could conceive of death: that is possible only
-to the reflecting and comparing mind. He fears the suffering that must
-follow from an attack from creatures of superior strength and fierce
-appetites. So man fears that his animal existence, which he does
-know,—with all its changes,—may be painfully cut off. As a rational
-being, man knows that death is only a natural and never-ending change.
-He knows that life is only that which he recognizes as humanness in
-himself when he meditates upon it. He says to himself, “I feel my
-life, not as I have been or as I shall be, but I feel it thus: that
-I am, that I never began anywhere, that I shall never end anywhere.”
-According to this view, death does not exist.
-
-His animal view of life, as the changes in his body, differs so much
-from the spiritual view of life as Unseen Consciousness, that he cannot
-reconcile them. They lead to “warring in his members,” a conflict
-between the limitations of the mind and the intuitions of the soul.
-This causes fear.
-
-There is, of course, a merely physical shrinking from death, the result
-of race inheritance. In the early days of our race, before man had
-learned to control the forces of material life, those men or races of
-men that did not love life, feared death and avoided it, made less
-effort, and took less care of their lives, and, accordingly, soon
-ceased to exist. Only the hardy survived. The fear of death helped to
-preserve the race.
-
-But this inherited shrinking from death is not what tortures man. What
-causes the uneasiness is rather that superstitious fear of death,
-which is really fear of a life after the throes of death. We have
-made this present life so unreasonable and so inconsistent with our
-own nature that we feel as if any life after death must be just as
-incomprehensible and inconsistent as this one, so we fear it. We fail
-to see that all life goes on developing and improving, and so we think
-our future life may be much worse than what we have now; then, like
-Hamlet, we ask is it really “better to endure the ills we have than
-fly to others that we know not of?” Because we hold these two views
-of life, the animal’s view and the spirit’s view, we seem to hear two
-voices crying in our hearts when we consider things: the voice of the
-Body and the voice of the Soul. The Body says, “I shall cease to be,
-I shall die, all that I set my life in shall die.” The Soul cries,
-“I am, I cannot die, I ought not to die,” and, as if from still deeper
-depths, comes an appalling whisper, “Yet I am dying.” (Tolstoy.)
-
-It is because of this contradiction that terror seizes the mind when
-we think of the death of the flesh. Man has so long assumed that his
-fleshly life is the same as himself that he cannot easily rid himself
-of the idea. Yet, if a man lose a hand or an arm or a leg by accident,
-he does not think that part of his consciousness or self is gone. He
-knows that a part of his body—through which himself is made manifest
-to other men—is gone, but he does not for a moment think that he, the
-human being, is any less. And he is not.
-
-It is true that the automatic processes of his mind refuse for some
-time to accept the loss of the members of his body, he misses that way
-of expressing his will. But that is not so strange as it may at first
-seem. All voluntary motion arises from desire, and is sent out from the
-directing mind by means of the nerves to the part of the body fitted to
-perform that motion. We are not conscious of sending an order to any
-nerve center when we wish to put one foot before the other in walking
-or to use our fingers in writing.
-
-Yet such an order is given, and the desire and the nerve center have
-both learned from repeated experiences just how properly to direct that
-message to the foot or to the tips of the fingers. If, for any reason,
-we miscalculate, we find ourselves walking haltingly or stumblingly
-along; or our fingers do not move the pencil fairly so as to get the
-right results. So, too, when we have lost a foot or a hand, the nerve
-centers send out their messages with the same force as before, but
-the messages find no way of being delivered. But at no time does a
-man think that he is less himself because of the missing member. For
-myself and my body are not one and the same. _Myself_ is that which
-lives in my body, and neither that body nor the years it exists in any
-way determine the life of myself. This self of mine, which thinks and
-feels, is older than recorded time; why, then, should we think that
-it will end with the century? It would not be possible, within the
-few years that the body exists, for the intelligence or consciousness
-of the individual to begin at nothingness and attain the degree of
-development of a human being.
-
-This self or consciousness is really the outcome of the impressions,
-experiences, and conclusions of my ancestors for thousands upon
-thousands of years back, and this self began to be shaped even by that
-from which man sprang. It is continuous; just as it began before my
-body was formed, so it must go on after the body ceases to exist; it
-cannot be a mere part of the body which will change with it or end with
-it.
-
-We do not know, as yet, how we shall continue to live after the body is
-laid away: whether in the thoughts and feelings and deeds we have done
-in the flesh; or in our unending, though unconscious, influence; or in
-the lives of the children of our bodies or of our minds and hearts.
-But we do know that the world will never be the same as if we had never
-been here. We do know that what has existed through unnumbered ages
-will not end in this.
-
-Life does not cease with sleep nor end with death. “I never was not,”
-says the Bhagavad Gita, “nor shall I hereafter cease to be.”
-
-
-
-
-CHAPTER XXXVI
-
-REST AND SLEEP
-
- O Happy Sleep! that bear’st upon thy breast
- The blood-red poppy of enchanting rest.
-
- ADA LOUISE MARTIN.
-
-
-One of the main purposes of sleep is to secure rest to men. But
-intelligence will find rest in many other ways independent of sleep or
-of promoting sleep. We are just beginning, under the leadership of such
-people as Miss Eva Vescelius, to make a full use of music as a soother
-of the nerves: yet, as long ago as the time of David, some persons knew
-its value. Browning’s magnificent poem, “Saul,” recounts its force.
-
-As David exorcised Saul’s evil spirit by the skillful harp and voice,
-so those who are studying the therapeutics of music are now helping
-the physically and mentally ill. Miss Vescelius and those working with
-her claim that “music is capable of great life-awakening energy....
-The use of music for healing the sick is therefore a natural use of a
-natural power. Music, like medicine, has been divided into classes as
-stimulants, sedatives, and narcotics. It is now admitted that music
-can be so employed as to exercise a distinct psychological influence
-upon the mind, the nerve centers and the circulatory system, and that
-by the intelligent use of music many ills may be cured.” For almost all
-of us “music hath charms to soothe.” Others again find in some form of
-massage a sweet though artificial sedative; some even in the combing
-of the hair, which is possibly connected with an electric effect, for
-we know little definitely as yet of the principles of the possible
-curative force of electricity.
-
-Others again rest by a mere mental change in their ordinary avocations.
-My wife was once talking with Mr. Stiegler, a well-known riding teacher
-in New York, and he said that he was in the saddle every day from six
-or seven in the morning till eleven at night, with only short intervals
-for meals. “It’s a hard life,” he said.
-
-“But Sundays?” the lady asked.
-
-“Oh, Sundays! I have Sundays to myself.” “And what do you do on
-Sundays?” “Oh!” he said, “I take a ride in the Park.” The relief from
-the strain of watching the pupils and their horses was rest to him.
-
-When Weston had won his first six days’ walk in Madison Square Garden,
-he went out to take a walk on Fifth Avenue on the Sunday.
-
-To find harmony with our own natures, to act in accordance with our
-natural or acquired tendencies, is rest. A peaceful surrounding is rest
-in itself, though sleep may not be wooed. One may be rested by a walk
-in a country lane, when a walk in the bustle of Broadway would only
-tire him the more.
-
-And this peaceful surrounding may be interior just as well as exterior.
-Mrs. Elizabeth Burns Ferm, who has a playhouse for children on the
-East Side in New York, and does a great deal of other work, recently
-said: “I could never accomplish what I do if I did not sleep so well.
-That rests me completely. I do not dream nor stir. I drop into the
-homogeneous, forgetting myself and becoming just a part of life. In
-this way I rest.” The oldest books show that, ever since there have
-been any records of man, he has been seeking happiness and rest, yet he
-has not attained either happiness or rest. But the seeking has helped
-in his growth upward and progress has been his reward. As Browning says:
-
- “Progress is man’s distinguishing mark alone;
- Not God’s; not the beasts’: He is; they are;
- Man partly is and wholly hopes to be.”
-
-Even though man seeks in wrong directions, he is sure to move onward
-so long as he continues to seek, for, if we sufficiently desire any
-goal, we shall eventually find it. “What d’ye lack? quoth God,”
-says Emerson, “take it and pay the price.” Jesus put the same thing
-in another form. Said he, “Ask and it shall be given you; seek and
-ye shall find; knock and it shall be opened unto you.” Those who
-misunderstand life and its purposes apply this only to what are called
-religious matters, but those who see farther into life know that it
-applies in every way. It all depends upon what we feel that we lack. If
-we feel we lack pleasure, or happiness, or rest, we seek them along the
-lines we think they may be found. And we pay the price that is asked.
-We cannot avoid this so long as cause and effect follow each other.
-
-If we seek happiness through selfish gratifications, we pay the price
-of disappointment and pain, if we are at all enlightened. Of course, if
-a man lives the life of the animal merely, cutting himself off from any
-recognition of the claims of his fellows, he may get all the happiness
-he can understand through self-seeking. But the price he pays is that
-he is not able to understand or to appreciate more than this lesser
-happiness. As Walter Scott says:
-
- “For him no minstrel raptures swell.
- Proud though his title, high his fame,
- Boundless his wealth as wish can claim;
- Despite those titles, power and pelf,
- The wretch, concentered all in self,
- Living shall forfeit fair renown,
- And, doubly dying, shall go down
- To the vile dust from whence he sprung,
- Unwept, unhonored, and unsung.”
-
-This is the price he pays.
-
-If we seek happiness through the happiness of all; if we forget self,
-understanding that all are One, seeking that wisdom which comes only
-from seeing all life as one, we, in like measure, get the reward.
-
-Men, mere animal men, who understand nothing but self-seeking, may
-speak evil of us, they probably will, but even that cannot “hurt” us.
-We shall understand that such evil speaking is the best they know, and
-that, therefore, it is not evil to their minds. Moreover, the further
-premium to us will be a broader understanding, a deepening love, an
-increase of happiness, an influx of peace, a pervading sense of rest,
-and quiet sleep.
-
-This is a premium most of us would be willing to work for, did we but
-see it. And we may see it if we will. If we ask of life that we get
-into harmony with its purposes; if we seek diligently even into our own
-hearts for those purposes; if we knock at the door of man’s full life,
-we shall find our asking answered, our search rewarded, and the door
-wide open. What a man desireth most, that, somehow, somewhere, shall be
-gain. Desire creates function.
-
-And, when the soul has gained what it sought, we shall find beauties
-and virtues hitherto unsuspected in every human being; we shall learn
-that, above the turmoil and noise of our rushing, jarring, modern
-civilization, we can hear the morning stars sing together for joy, the
-music of the spheres, that which shall yet soothe man’s fear and teach
-him to find restful sleep.
-
-
-
-
-CHAPTER XXXVII
-
-THE NEED OF REST
-
- The bliss of an unbroken sleep.
-
- THOS. W. PARSONS.
-
-
-To go in the wrong direction delays our journey and brings fatigue, but
-that fatigue may teach us needed lessons.
-
-Man seeks happiness through outer things, hoping to find it in wealth,
-excitement, travel, self-gratification, and in countless other ways
-that the age-long experience of men have proved to be ineffectual; but
-he usually forgets that the wellspring of happiness is within. Long
-before Solomon had announced that “this also is vanity and vexation
-of spirit,” men had observed that riches do not bring happiness;
-that excitement wearies us, that travel is unsatisfying, and that
-gratification of the senses ends in exhaustion.
-
-At last, in despair of satisfaction in the world, we have accepted
-the teaching that there is no rest on this side of the grave. We have
-even learned to glorify strain and the strenuous life as natural
-and desirable. At best, men have thought of rest as something that
-concerned the body, and have confounded it with sleep and inaction.
-
-If we think we have important work to do, we say, “We have no time
-to rest,” as if any work would be laid upon us that ought to prevent
-us having rest. Draught horses have been bred for centuries for the
-sole purpose of work, yet a wise driver never overloads nor overworks
-his horse. He sees that it is comfortably housed, well fed, and has
-its needed rest. Shall we think that the Spirit of Life has less
-consideration for man than man has for the horse? That were in effect
-to say that man were greater and wiser than that which caused man, and
-which man has spent the ages trying to understand.
-
-When we stop to think of this we can see how foolish it is, but we
-seldom stop to think until something “happens” that stops us. We go
-on from day to day thinking that we have no time to rest. This state
-of mind, which leads to trouble, is possible only because we do not
-understand what rest is, nor how easy it is to have it. We ordinarily
-seek rest only after we have become exhausted.
-
-When we have wearied ourselves with worry, useless exertion, and
-fretting, or with envy, hatred, or malice; when we have bent all our
-energies to some low aim or selfish purpose; when we have broken nearly
-all of Nature’s laws and are called upon to pay the penalty, we seek
-a physician. A man sets a shifting standard of wealth as his goal,
-and strains to attain it; he eats improperly and in great haste, his
-thoughts filled with the problems of the market; he is forever on the
-alert for any advantage that he may take of his fellows; he cannot
-endure to have another reap an advantage that is denied him; he is
-envious of every bit of success that, passing him by, goes to another;
-he makes of his life one fierce round of money-getting. Then, perhaps
-before attaining his goal, perhaps after reaching it, he discovers
-himself a physical wreck, and hastens to his physician, seeking
-external means to cure that which has its root in internal conditions;
-asking the man of drugs to “minister to a mind diseased.” To the
-nervous, worried, hurried person, from whatever cause, the physician’s
-advice is generally the same—“Take a complete rest,” meaning thereby
-that all work be given up and inaction take the place of activity. When
-circumstances allow it, we try to follow this advice, but it usually
-results in boredom and impatience at the lost time; when circumstances
-do not allow the inactivity, we get discouraged and complain of life
-as a series of mysterious, unjust happenings. The physician’s advice
-proves a mockery and we become listless and discouraged.
-
-We hardly ever seek our rest from moment to moment; for we continue
-to look upon it as something we shall find after our work is done. The
-laborer, the merchant, and the professional man think of the end of
-the day as resting-time, just as the busy housewife does. It matters
-not how much we may love our work, we expect to be exhausted by our
-efforts before the day is over. We feel hurried, anxious, fretted, and
-overworked all day long, and comfort ourselves with the prospect of
-rest at night. And all the time we might rest and never find the day so
-short as to cause worry, nor the hours so long nor the work so hard as
-to tire us.
-
-It is only when we are burdened with distracting cares that we get
-tired by what is a joy to us. The true artist wants no eight-hour day;
-he laments only that daylight fades so soon. When we are doing only
-what we love to do, and doing it well, we run and are not weary, we
-walk and do not faint.
-
-Of late years the trainers of athletes have recognized this—they think
-it more important to keep the men buoyant and fresh than to increase
-the muscles at the risk of bringing them “stale” to the day of
-contest. They insist that the men shall not exhaust themselves at any
-time before the race.
-
-Exhaustion shows either that we have been doing the wrong thing or
-doing it wrong, and kindly Nature reproves us with the loss of Sleep.
-
-
-
-
-CHAPTER XXXVIII
-
-SAVING OF EFFORT
-
- Rocked in the cradle of the deep
- I lay me down in peace to sleep.
-
- EMMA WILLARD.
-
-
-The unsatisfied longing for rest in all mankind will be attributed to
-different causes according to the way we look at life. The physical or
-animal man desires rest because of the relief it will bring to nerves
-and muscles wearied by the strain of activities; he feels that to relax
-will bring him some ease and that relaxation will help him to forget
-the bodily weariness. Recovering from weariness or pain is a pleasure
-in itself. The sigh of relief is really a sigh of pleasure.
-
-When the mind reigns, it instinctively recognizes that rest would
-restore the balance disturbed by feverish exertions. Our whole lives
-seem passed in a struggle to attain something, and the law of rhythm,
-which is the law of action and reaction, requires that, after struggle,
-effort should cease. One implies the other; neither effort nor true
-rest can continue steadily. Effort is the breaking of rest; shadow is
-only the relative absence of light.
-
-It is contrast that makes sensations; the shadow serves to make the
-light brighter; the night makes the day more fair; and noon makes the
-night darker. Tennyson recognized this in the line, “Sorrow’s crown of
-sorrow is remembering happier things.” He might have said, with equal
-truth, that the present joy has a warmer flush because of forgotten
-pain.
-
-Wagner understood that, and so we find crash and seeming inharmony
-so often a prelude to the softest, tenderest strains. The mind first
-wearies of monotony, even of harmony, and then ceases to be able to
-perceive it. Wagner saw this, and introduced clashing sound that
-seems like discord until we feel its connection with the emotion and
-the context of the piece. These relieve the emotions and throw the
-harmonies into relief. Says Hobbes: to have one sensation and to have
-it continually would be to have none.
-
-The mental man feels and knows all this, and to him rest becomes
-necessary to restore that balance of things that contrast suggests—rest
-after effort, peace after turmoil.
-
-The spiritual man goes still deeper into true conditions in his longing
-for rest. Rest carries with it the idea of attainment. He who has
-attained has peace: “Peace I leave with you; my peace I give unto
-you.” The unity of all three desires—that of the body, that of the
-mind, and that of the spirit—cannot fail to strike the thinker. To
-cease to strain is the keynote of ease. Why? Because man sees, however
-dimly, that agonizing, like antagonizing, is really futile, and that
-the only thing that is necessary is to put one’s self in harmony with
-the Universe.
-
-Herbert Spencer has shown that grace of movement consists in the
-economy of effort, in doing every act with the least possible waste
-of power. The same thought is the basis of the teaching of the great
-Delsarte. As Ruskin says: “Is not the evidence of ease on the very
-front of all the greatest works in existence? Do they not say plainly
-to us, not ‘there has been a great effort here,’ but ‘there has been
-a great power here’? It is not the weariness of mortality, but the
-strength of divinity, which we have to recognize in all things; and
-this is just what we now never recognize, but think that we shall do
-great things by the help of iron bars and perspiration. Alas! we shall
-do nothing that way, but lose some pounds of our own weight.” The best
-way to attain anything is to move towards it with the least possible
-jarring or friction. In every struggle we lose force, because we are
-sure to make unnecessary motions. Men do not learn this from their
-daily work as unconsciously as they once did, because machinery has
-so largely displaced handwork. But, even in using machinery, he is the
-best workman who has learned to run his machine and get good results
-with the least expenditure of physical effort. Such a workman remains
-fresh for a longer period, and accomplishes more in a given time. The
-machine itself is constructed upon the principle of saving effort—it
-cuts out all unnecessary motion and reduces friction as much as
-possible.
-
-If you watch a skilled typesetter at his case, you will find that
-apparently he is never in a rush. The beginner, especially if he is one
-of the more nervous type, looks anxious, pauses with hand fluttering
-above the case while he considers in which box he will find the letter
-he seeks; then, when he has made a decision, he will pounce upon it
-and deposit it in the stick with breathless haste. Not so the seasoned
-compositor. There is no haste, no fluttering, no waste motion. His hand
-goes unerringly to the box where he will find the letter he wants, in
-a twinkling it is in place in the stick, and another letter disposed
-of in the same way, and you are scarcely conscious of motion. The
-perfect workman is he who has learned to accomplish most with the least
-expenditure of effort. It is toward this perfection that Frederick
-W. Taylor and others are striving in the new “Business Efficiency.”
-Every day we are surprised to learn that what _we_ gained by hard
-struggle has been gained with scarcely an effort by another. It does
-not always make us happy to learn it. We often feel as if we had been
-tricked, and we think that effort spent in what we now see was not the
-most effective way, was wasted. This leads us sometimes to persist in a
-mistaken course, because we are unwilling to believe that we have lost
-so much time and missed so much result. But no effort is ever wasted:
-it is only by the effort to do well that we can learn to do better.
-
-Nothing is commoner than to hear our friends say, “I don’t sleep—the
-work is so hard and exacting I get dead tired and then toss about
-all night.” But it is not the work, rather it is the worker that is
-exacting.
-
-
-
-
-CHAPTER XXXIX
-
-ANTAGONISM
-
- Lord of the Darkness, Master of the Sun,
- Strip me of all my strenuous life has won,
- But let Sleep’s sweet oblivion o’er me sweep,
- Closing Night’s leering eyes—oh, give me sleep!
-
- ANONYMOUS.
-
-
-Though you want rest, peace, sleep—the opposites of strife—yet people
-will oppose you and want you to go their impossible ways. That need
-not arouse opposition, nor break your rest, nor disturb the even tenor
-of your way. One disadvantage of allowing ourselves to be disturbed is
-that we cannot be angry with one person without being angry with all
-about us. Or at least the harmony of our relation is broken, because,
-despite our effort, we cannot succeed in separating ourselves from our
-brothers. The next time you are angry or impatient with someone who has
-opposed you, take note how it affects your tone and your feeling toward
-those who are innocent of any offense.
-
-One such investigation into our own condition when annoyed will help
-to cure us of being angry; for there is no use in trying to correct
-all the mistakes or worrying over the neglects of others, even of the
-children of our own bodies. Other people, “the same as us,” have to
-learn by their mistakes, and often do learn by some success that we
-considered manifestly impossible.
-
-As we could not be wisdom and conscience to the whole world, Providence
-has kindly given us enough to do in taking care of our own actions.
-
-When Mosenthal was organist at Calvary Church, the brides used to give
-him directions about just what pieces they wanted played at their
-weddings; Mosenthal would say, “Ah! that is a beautiful selection,”
-or “A magnificent march!” As he said, “I listen to all the lovely
-ladies’ orders—then I play what I think best—and it always goes all
-right.” He did not make rows by trying to convince excited girls
-that the “Mikado” would not be just the thing for the church, or
-to persuade nice mammas without musical education that “Traumerei”
-would not do for a wedding. It was not necessary to lie, only to give
-what approval could be given and then to “gae his ain gait.” Most
-people are not really much set in their own ways, they only seem to
-be. They have an idea (or they think they have one—an idea is a rare
-and precious possession) and they want to “get it off.” Let them; why
-should you make the explosion dangerous by confining it? Maybe they
-were only trying to argue with themselves, and, having got rid of the
-idea, they are content, if their self-love is not roused in defense of
-it. Like the codfish which deposits her eggs and has no more care about
-them, they are quite content to leave the results to Nature.
-
-There was a tract called the “Oiled Feather,” which was very popular
-in England forty years ago. Sam, a wagoner, has a bottle of oil with
-a feather stuck in the cork, and, when a barn-door sticks or harness
-creaks or a king-bolt binds, instead of using force, he always brings
-out his oil bottle and feather. His friend has not learned the
-usefulness of gentle methods and gets into all sorts of trouble, until
-he sees that the Oiled Feather principle applies to horses and to
-people and to difficulties, as well as to things.
-
-“Est modus in rebus”—which means that “there is a way in things” just
-as much as in people: get into key with it and all will go smoothly.
-Did you ever try to split trap-rock with a hammer? You may batter all
-day at one side and you will only knock off chips, spoil your hammer,
-and hurt your hands: but, when you have found the right spot, a tap
-knocks it in pieces. That tap is the “open sesame” to which alone the
-stone will yield. You may storm at it all day with your “open millet”
-or “open wheat,” but its heart can be reached only by its own word. So
-the stony heart of the world can be broken only by the Master Word of
-Love.
-
-Now, if you have made what is said in Chapter XXVII your own, you do
-not need all this; for you know that, as long as you arouse antagonism
-in others, you can be annoyed and irritated by others, but not one
-moment longer. The punching-bag can neither dent nor be dented: if it
-is so made that it injures no one, it turns out that no one injures it,
-no matter how roughly he strikes it.
-
-When your lovelight shines in darkness, not only will your own path be
-bright, but you will be a guide and a comforter to others, and they
-will follow you.
-
-
-
-
-CHAPTER XL
-
-STRUGGLE IN THE FAMILY
-
- How happy is that balm to wretches, sleep!
-
- BEAUMONT.
-
-
-If all that we have learned were that some persons “naturally” work
-harder than others to achieve anything, we might say that this was
-unavoidable; and there would be a degree of truth in it. It is true
-that the intelligence of some people is so sluggish that they learn
-little from experience. They continue to work towards any end in the
-same way that they have always worked, wasting both strength and time.
-For them there is nothing but repeated experiences and patient guidance
-until they learn to apply their knowledge practically.
-
-But the intelligent man learns that, often where he has worked in
-the hardest possible way, he has had the most unsatisfactory return
-for his effort. The good housekeeper, for instance, wishes above all
-things to make her family comfortable; she has inherited a feeling of
-the requirements of healthy living, and decides that she must have a
-scrupulously clean house to protect her loved ones from the dangers of
-germs and microbes.
-
-So she sweeps, scrubs, cleans from morning until night; carefully
-removes every trace of dust, follows her family with dust-pan and
-brush, and at least looks reproachfully at the offender who does not
-remove every trace of street or garden dirt from his shoes before
-entering the house. She cleans so hard that she forgets that the real
-object of cleaning is to make her family safe and comfortable. They may
-be safe, but they are a long way from being comfortable, and she knows
-no more comfort than they; cleanliness has become a fetich with her,
-and some day, perhaps, she comes to her senses, finding herself chasing
-the motes in a sunbeam, lest by chance they should rest upon her sacred
-furniture.
-
-If she then sits down to take stock of things, she finds that husband
-and children almost dread to come home. However serene and happy they
-may be before reaching the garden gate, or the apartment door, they
-then become nervous and distrait. They look themselves over, to be
-sure that nothing is amiss, for “mother is so particular.” An anxious
-expression settles upon their faces, for, with their best endeavors,
-they may have overlooked something that mother’s trained and suspicious
-eye may note. The joy of life abates, and a sort of painful hush falls
-upon things.
-
-The average child cannot see that this condition grows out of
-misdirected love and care; he sees no connection between it and his
-well-being, but, if he thinks of it at all, he concludes that “the
-house” counts for more with mother than anything else. Husband and
-children unconsciously come to regard her as mainly a housekeeper, with
-interests bounded by the four walls of the home. The very gifts they
-make her are of a useful nature—“something for the house”—as if the
-“house” were some special thing in her personal life but meant nothing
-to them.
-
-When the hungry heart of this woman pains her, she resents the
-condition that she herself has created, but does not see the correct
-remedy. Her husband and children have put her out of their inner lives;
-they take their pleasures away from home, they find their confidantes
-among outside friends. Who should share their thoughts and their
-pleasures? she asks. Who has worked day and night for their comfort
-and happiness as she has? And the chances are that she considers them
-ungrateful and herself a martyr, when all the time she herself builds
-the barrier between them and herself by striving to make them happy
-in her way. That it is not their way, and so could not be in harmony
-with the natural trend of things, does not once occur to her. As the
-French say, “Madam costs herself too much.” She has not learned, and
-may never learn, that the only way to make others happy is to love them
-sincerely and unselfishly enough to allow them to be happy in their
-own way.
-
-Sometimes it is the father who destroys the joy of home. A many good
-men think that their duty is done when they provide food, clothes,
-shelter, and education for their children, and insist upon obedience
-from them. They are so busy attending to these things that they have no
-time to get acquainted with their children, to know or be known by them.
-
-There is too much truth in the newspaper joke on the suburbanite. A
-mother found her little boy crying bitterly on the doorstep quite early
-on a Monday morning.
-
-“What is the matter, Freddie?” she asked, anxiously.
-
-“Why,” sobbed the child, “I was just running down the street when the
-man who stops here on Sundays spanked me and sent me home.” There are
-many children who have no cause to welcome “the man who stops here on
-Sundays,” even though he may be counted “a good father.” Very often
-he “takes a nap,” and all noise must cease for his benefit; or, he
-cannot read his Sunday paper while they are playing about. He speaks
-testily to his wife, blaming her that she does not quiet the children.
-“They have all the week to play,” he complains, “I should think they
-could keep quiet on Sunday. It is the only day I have to rest, and you
-ought to see that I am not disturbed.” And the mother, who hasn’t even
-Sunday to rest, quiets the children in the only way she knows, and
-everybody is wretched.
-
-As fast as the children grow up they leave home gladly for college
-or business, and, though they respect and fear “the Head of the
-Family,” they have no real love for him; they never consult him on
-their intimate, personal worries or problems, and he many times carries
-a sore heart behind his seemingly stern manner. He wonders why his
-children are so ungrateful, when he has spent his whole life toiling
-for them. In his bitter moments he may even call them monsters of
-ingratitude; forgetting, as Dickens says, that he is really looking for
-“monsters of gratitude.” These parents, like everyone else, have it in
-their power to attract to themselves the affection and the surroundings
-that they need, and to create a center of repose even in the midst of
-strife; rest we may attain even amid turmoil; but true repose means
-that quiet shall spread from us to others.
-
-
-
-
-CHAPTER XLI
-
-UNNATURAL LAWS
-
- So many Gods, so many creeds,
- So many paths that wind and wind,
- When just the art of being kind
- Is all this sad world needs.
-
- ELLA WHEELER WILCOX.
-
-
-But the harmony of the home does not depend upon the parents alone. If
-it did, it would forever disprove the statement that it is only by a
-working together of all parts of any organization that its real purpose
-may be accomplished. A clock is intended to tell the time, and its
-mechanism is so constructed that, by its working together, the hands
-and chime will mark the hours. But, if we could imagine the hands of
-the clock refusing to move in the direction that the springs, wheels,
-and pendulum required, and insisting upon going their own way, the
-usefulness of the clock would be destroyed.
-
-So, in the matter of family harmony, it may be merely some self-willed
-son or daughter, even a child, that causes the discord. And he is not
-necessarily a “bad” child, either. He may be endowed with special
-gifts, and be particularly adapted to give joy to those about him. He
-loves his parents, his brothers and sisters, and also that intangible
-“home” that counts for so much in life—yet, because he loves his “own
-way” more than all else, he makes “home” impossible. He is so sure
-of his infallible judgment that he opposes every suggestion that does
-not come from himself; he offers free advice on every possible and
-impossible occasion; he “takes sides” on every question that arises,
-and considers any opposition as a personal attack or affront. He is
-not conscious of these or of any other faults, yet every remark, every
-act is tested by its possible reference to himself. He looms so large
-in his own foreground that he cannot see how he could be unimportant
-to anybody’s life or thought. He broods over fancied wrongs and thinks
-himself the most ill-used of mortals. Everybody is unhappy where he is,
-and he is most unhappy of all.
-
-For it is a well-established fact, one which we may find proved every
-day both in our own experience and the experience of other people,
-that he who makes another unhappy generally makes himself still more
-wretched.
-
-If our experience shows us any exceptions to this rule, it is, after
-all, only in seeming. He who can make another unhappy and not be
-conscious of it, is among those whom Epictetus calls blind in that
-knowledge which distinguisheth right from wrong. He has not felt his
-close relation, or, indeed, any relation to his fellows. He cannot
-know any of the joys of fellowship, and he will not find the pleasure
-he expects even in his own pursuits. For it matters little, so far as
-seeing is concerned, whether a man be born blind, or whether he keeps
-his eyes tightly bandaged all his days. In either case he gets none of
-the sensations of pleasure that come from being able and willing to
-see. If we persist in having “our own way,” we must pay the price.
-Most of the miseries of life are caused by failure to get in harmony
-with the laws of life. This is as simple and self-evident as walking up
-the street. If we persist in keeping to the left on a busy sidewalk,
-we shall be jostled and pushed until we are sore and out of breath and
-make but little headway withal. But, if we are careful to walk with
-the crowd going in our direction, if we remember always to keep to the
-right, we shall find it easy to get along even at the “rush” hour.
-Those who do not observe this rule of harmonious progress not only find
-walking on a busy street hard work, but they also make it harder for
-others. One man walking the wrong way may compel twenty more to violate
-the sidewalk customs to overcome his opposition. But, when everyone
-observes the rule, it leads to a saving of time and temper and makes
-life safer for all who are in the crowd.
-
-Generally speaking, we recognize no law but that of our own will, which
-is by no means the same thing as the far-wider law of our being. We
-cannot separate our lives from the greater life. While we follow the
-law of our own will, self-will, we never know real happiness or rest.
-Like many another man-made law, our antagonistic wills are a perversion
-of the natural law which governs our lives.
-
-
-SLEEP’S CONQUEST
-
- Invisible armies come, we know not whence,
- And like a still, insinuating tide
- Encompass us about on every side,
- Imprisoning each weary outpost sense,
- Till thought is taken, sleeping in his tents!
- Yet now the conquerer with lofty pride
- Becomes our guardian, with us doth abide
- And plans all night our wondrous recompense.
- He takes away the weary, worn-out day,
- And brings to-morrow—bride without a stain;
- Gives us fresh liberty, a chance to mend;
- Life, hope, and friends enhanced with fresh array.
- Then when we fail he conquers us again,
- Paroling us each day until the end.
-
- CHARLES H. CRANDALL.
-
-(Courtesy of Harper & Brothers.)
-
-
-
-
-CHAPTER XLII
-
-THE NATURAL LAW
-
-
-But what is the law of our being? It is harmony, peace, rest. We have
-but to look at the workings of our own marvelous physical bodies to
-perceive that law. The more we study the human body, the more we wonder
-at its mechanism. Yet every part of this intricate machinery, in
-harmony with each other part, finds its own work, unless man, through
-his misunderstanding, throws it out of order.
-
-Perhaps the strongest proof of the naturally harmonious working of the
-body is found in the responsive distress or disease which result from
-the wrong use of any one function. It is not necessary to cut the heart
-itself to injure it. To sever an artery anywhere will interfere with
-the perfection of the heart’s work as effectively as a direct injury to
-the heart. To bring bad news may stop its action forever.
-
-It is not necessary to strike the head to cause a headache; that will
-follow if we abuse the stomach, or live so that the liver becomes
-deranged. We get these results because of the perfect harmony in which
-all the parts of the body work when we conform to the law of our
-being. The pain is a kindly monitor, warning us that we have violated
-some law and bidding us get into line once more. It is always wise to
-heed such warning, gratefully.
-
-Suppose that a man has a cellar which is so dark and damp and dirty
-that he hates to go into it, and tries to forget it. But it is flooded
-in a storm, and he is forced to go down to examine it, and then finds
-that the wall is unsafe, and must be supported, else the house may
-fall. Will he not say, “It was well that the flood came that took me
-down into the depths, so that I might find what was endangering my
-property and the lives of my family?” And if, in addition, he not only
-reinforces and buttresses the wall, but also lets in the light and
-cleans up the cellar, he will actually remove out of his life what was
-always a disagreeable and neglected task. He will add to the value of
-his property, and have besides a security in his house that he would
-never have had but for the “accident.” So we, if we heed the first
-pain that tells us we have violated the law of harmony in our physical
-body, may be led into a better and truer understanding of ourselves
-than ever before.
-
-If the law of the physical body is harmony, peace, rest, it must be
-true that the law of the intelligence and the law of the spirit are the
-same. If it were not so, there would be constant warring between the
-three natures—physical, intellectual, and emotional—and happiness and
-rest would be impossible.
-
-Harmony, peace, rest are the blessings that all men crave, even when
-they do not understand their own desires. To say that peace and rest
-are inherently impossible of attainment is to say that we are formed
-with desires that tantalize and torment us, as a mirage tantalizes the
-traveler dying of thirst in the desert, with no hope of satisfying
-those desires. It is in effect to say that a cruel monster governs this
-world and takes delight in our suffering.
-
-He who tries with apparent disregard of harmony to enforce his own will
-is, after all, striving in his blind and hopeless way for harmony.
-He thinks that to make his will supreme would bring peace, and so he
-tries to have his own way: that accounts for much tyranny, especially
-domestic tyranny.
-
-That so few do attain happiness and rest in their lives is because of
-this misunderstanding of life rather than from any inability to gain
-happiness and rest. We allow trifles to distract us from our real
-purpose. We feel ourselves so pressed and oppressed by petty cares that
-we cannot find time during the day to do all that we feel we must do.
-It would be well for us to follow Pitt’s rule, to do our part in the
-world instead of trying to run it.
-
-If that rule worked in his high and responsible position, it would
-probably work in our less important places. Most of us spend our
-strength for that which is naught, largely because we do not examine
-the nature of the “duty” which presents itself to us. We should
-probably find that our duties are not worth doing, or else that another
-could do them as well.
-
-Rest brings sleep more than sleep brings rest.
-
-
-
-
-CHAPTER XLIII
-
-“LETTING GO”
-
- In sleep’s sweet fetters bound.
-
- LORD NEAVES.
-
-
-A frequent cause of suffering among men and women is their idea
-that they are necessary to the running of things. Usually they find
-themselves mistaken. The head of a firm was once warned by a physician
-that he must take a rest to avert a breakdown, but the man declared
-it to be an impossibility for him to get away from the office for
-even a week. He gripped his business so tight that he could not let
-go, nor could he see that others could do it as well as he could. In
-such a state of mind the doctor’s warning added another worry, fear
-for himself,—so at last the predicted breakdown came. He had reached
-the point where he had to let go, for his grip, both physical and
-mental, was gone. For six months he could not concern himself with
-business affairs, the necessity of fighting for life and renewed health
-occupying all his faculties. He refused to let himself think of the
-outcome, but put his attention upon getting well.
-
-When he returned to his business, with his mind braced to stand any
-disasters that he might discover, he was astonished to find everything
-in perfect condition, and that his assistant had even corrected the
-errors he had himself made in the last weeks of overworked body and
-fagged brain. It was at first a blow to his pride that he was not
-essential to the success of his own business, but, as he realized how
-big a price he had paid to learn this simple lesson, he made a decision
-that showed how far he had advanced beyond his former condition.
-
-Turning to his assistant, he said: “Smith, as you can carry on this
-business so well, I shall take three months’ vacation every year, and
-have no more expensive breakdowns; and, as I want you to continue
-to carry it on as well while I am away, you would better take three
-months’ vacation every year, too, so there shall be no breakdowns for
-you.” He had really learned two lessons in one—what things were not
-worth doing, and what things could be done by somebody else. He still
-had left “the things that were quite enough for any man to attempt.”
-No man is really indispensable to any undertaking, however much it may
-seem so to him. When James Alexander controlled the Equitable Life
-Assurance Society, he made it his rule to discharge anybody who seemed
-to be indispensable. His reason for this was that, the longer such a
-man was retained, the more indispensable he would become, until the
-association would be in danger of going to smash if anything happened
-to that one man. Common prudence dictated the advisability of getting
-rid of him while the company could manage to get along somehow without
-him.
-
-There was once a Dutchman who was of much the same opinion as Mr.
-Alexander. His manager applied for an increase of salary.
-
-“I t’ink I buys you bretty dear, alretty, Hans.” “Yes,” said Hans,
-“I get a good salary, but then I am worth it. I know everything and do
-everything about the business; in fact, you couldn’t get along without
-me.” “Ach, ish dot so? Vell; vat I do if you vas deat, Hans?” “Oh,
-well! if I were dead, you’d have to get along without me.” “Ach!”
-replied the Dutchman, slowly, “den, Hans, I t’inks we gonsiders you
-deat.” It is well to think sometimes of how nicely the world got along
-before we came to it, and how likely it is to do just as well after we
-have left it. If, when we are rushing around, weighed down by anxiety
-and a feeling of our own importance, we should “consider ourselves
-dead” for a few moments, we might find that the fever of life had
-subsided.
-
-We should have to admit that, judging from the past, the world would
-not even slip a cog if we were to pass from it. And even if we were
-ready to claim that no one heretofore had been so important, and no
-one could ever again be so necessary, even then it were the part of
-wisdom to cease hurrying and worrying. For, as the human frame can be
-exhausted by overwork and overworry, it behooves the indispensable
-person to preserve himself as long as possible, so as to save the world
-from the catastrophe of his loss. The very thing he aims to do—save the
-world—he defeats by his anxiety and haste.
-
-Proper prudence tends to prevent trouble, not to prevent worry. No
-amount of precaution and care will cure worry. In fact, the prudence
-and care help to fix the thought on all the mischances, however
-improbable or impossible, that may be imagined.
-
-Elaborate precautions often defeat themselves, like a corporal who kept
-all his squad out as pickets till they were cut off one by one.
-
-I once saw a family going off to the country, five “masters” and
-three servants, eight hand-packages, coachman, footman, and an extra
-servant, and the family doctor to get them off. The cautious doctor got
-the tickets days before, and even got checks for the trunks. An extra
-trunk, taken at the last hour to hold some extra things that might be
-needed, upset all that arranging.
-
-The doctor went to the baggage-room in the gray dawn to get that
-precautionary trunk checked: after a long discussion about the
-place, he arranged to meet the family at the railway news-stand. The
-caretaker was shown once more how to work the burglar alarm, from
-which a necessary knob came off in the nervous hand of the Master of
-Cares—“telephone for the electrician” but at last the blinds were
-carefully pulled down, the house shut up and committed to Providence
-and the caretaker, and the family and its familiars arrived at the
-station nearly an hour before train-time, “getting off so nicely.” The
-Genius of Forethought sent out a pair of scouts to find the doctor.
-They returned, to report that there were three news-stands, but the
-doctor was not at any of them.
-
-Then this Genius of Care went himself with one of the scouts, a long
-and hurried walk to the baggage-room,—not there.
-
-Meanwhile, the doctor, who had stayed to see the trunks off, had found
-the main body with its camp-followers and light baggage. All stood
-in the station near a news-stand and waited for the return of the
-expedition, till the doctor got impatient as train-time approached and
-went off to find the Head of the House, who arrived in a flurry, having
-lost his own head a few minutes after he had gone with the tickets.
-
-At last, after the pilgrimage from the ticket-gate down to the
-parlor-car, they are in the train, all safe, thank God; but the Genius
-of Care did not sleep that night “on account of the worry and fuss
-of getting off.” That was not the doctor’s fault. Like Martha, he had
-made his own punishment the same as the rest of us by being “_careful_
-about many things.” I remember an Irish servant who was shown one of
-our big banks with its huge window-bars, to make it safe. “Sure,”
-she said, “what’s the good of them things? The thieves is inside and
-not out.” Worry is inside and not out, and Sleep, like the Kingdom of
-Heaven, is not taken by force.
-
-
-
-
-CHAPTER XLIV
-
-REST IN TRUTH
-
- The timely dew of sleep.
-
- MILTON.
-
-
-It is not our work that wears us, but the way we take it. So long as
-we think of rest as meaning only inactivity, just so long will the
-activities of life exhaust us. Goethe said:
-
- “Rest is not quitting the busy career,
- Rest is fitting oneself for one’s sphere.”
-
-When we do that, we find rest. But we may ask what is one’s sphere and
-how may one fit one’s self for it? If we wish to answer that truly,
-we must be willing to have some common misconceptions brushed away.
-The sphere of any individual is limited only by the possibilities of
-his own body, mind, and spirit. Our sphere is not a small circle of
-activities whose boundaries any man may mark. It widens as our inner
-nature expands, and what was the horizon line yesterday will be but
-a tiny hillock near at hand to-morrow. It includes all that has been
-achieved, and all that may be attained by the race.
-
-The best standard of our life is not only what the race as a whole
-has achieved in the way of development, but the highest and best that
-any person has yet taught or lived; this is the true measure of man’s
-sphere to-day. Ordinarily, we talk of man’s sphere and woman’s sphere
-as if there were a clear line of separation between them, and each were
-continued in its own little space. This could not be, for, so long as
-men and women have the same three natures—bodily, mental, spiritual—so
-long as we have similar needs, aims, and aspirations, the larger sphere
-of man, whether male or female, is the same, and is bounded only by the
-possibilities of the life of all three natures.
-
-To fit one’s self for such a sphere should bring rest while we are
-doing it, because that fitting means becoming harmonious with the
-purposes of the larger life; and rest is simply harmony, at-one-ness
-with the Universe.
-
-The possibilities of the life of all three natures are inexhaustible.
-We have never touched the limit of even the physical man. Man at one
-time had only his hands for tools, and so was limited in his powers.
-But he used his mind to increase the power of his hands, and reached
-out for sticks and stones to help him. In time his thought devised
-implements that increased his physical power a thousandfold, until now
-he has harnessed not only steam, but the very currents of the air, and
-is making himself all-powerful.
-
-He does not wholly understand the forces he tries to control, but he
-studies them, experiments upon them, and makes servants of them as far
-as he has grasped their laws. Had he insisted upon considering his mind
-and his physical powers as entirely separate and refused to use them
-together, he might still have claws for hands, and might still be a
-mere burrower in the earth. Moreover, his mind would not have developed
-as it has. Steam and electricity might have aroused his curiosity, but
-he would not have known how to make them to do his will.
-
-Further, if man had been able to keep his intellect apart from his
-spirit, he would not have developed the qualities that lift him above
-the more intelligent animals. Sympathy and justice and love would not
-have come into his relations with his fellow-men.
-
-These moral feelings expressed in our bodies, our minds, and our hearts
-are some of the possibilities of the life of all three natures, and
-to endeavor to know and harmonize them, thus “fitting one’s self for
-one’s sphere,” would bring us the happiness that follows action and the
-rest that flows from selfless purpose or harmony.
-
-If we consider what the true object of life is, we cannot help trying
-to see the connection between the three natures of man. It does not
-seem possible that the life of any thinking being was intended to be a
-purposeless jarring jumble, or, as poor Stephen Blackpool said, “a’ a
-muddle.” We find such harmony in the life of the material world that
-we may expect to find a similar harmony in the life of man. So soon as
-we discover this, we see also that there must be harmony between the
-life of the material world and the life of man, and further harmony
-between both the material and the human life, and the Source of all
-life. Seeing this, and living it, is fitting ourselves for our sphere,
-preparing ourselves to take our destined places in the Universe as Men
-and Women.
-
-
-
-
-CHAPTER XLV
-
-THE SPAN OF LIFE
-
- We are such stuff as dreams are made on, and our little life
- Is rounded with a sleep.
-
- SHAKESPEARE.
-
-
-Only a generation ago it was the custom for men and women to begin
-to grow old at about forty-five. A person of fifty was always called
-“old,” and a man was expected to be decrepit at sixty, a woman much
-earlier. It is not wonderful that such men begrudged the time spent in
-sleep.
-
-When I was a boy, we used shamelessly to print books in big type,
-indorsed “For the Aged,” on the theory that everyone must be nearly
-blind at maturity. Even now Dr. George F. Stevens thinks that everyone
-“ought” to wear glasses after forty, notwithstanding that many
-Christian Scientists and Mental Scientists discard them long after that
-age.
-
-There is as much truth as wit in the saying that “A man is as old as
-he feels, a woman as old as she says she is.” We used to insist upon
-every year being counted and noted, too, in dress, occupation, and
-general demeanor. But we have changed all this—even natty dress now
-common to older people shows it—but the change has come about slowly,
-and there are still many who think that people of sixty should give
-up all active life and prepare to “grow old gracefully,” that is, to
-drop willingly into senility. Those who are willing so to slip into
-uselessness quietly, need much sleep; but even for them the sleep is
-not a waste of time, but an aid to length of days.
-
-There has been a great deal too much willingness to let go of active
-life, because of the idea that “threescore years and ten” was the
-natural limit of man’s life, and that to live beyond seventy-five was
-to live upon “borrowed time.” There is a sort of tickle for the mental
-palate in that expression “borrowed time,” but there is no substance
-in it, if we will but examine it. How can there be “borrowed” time and
-from whom is it borrowed?
-
-Life is not a thing that begins to-day and ends to-morrow. So far as
-we know, it has neither beginning nor end. It is beyond our power to
-picture a limit to all life. Well, if life has neither beginning nor
-end, if it has no limits, and if time is merely the unit by which we
-measure seasons, why should there be a limit to what we can use of it,
-and how could a continued use of it be called “borrowing”?
-
-In the earlier days of the race, when all progress was made through
-might, and war settled every question, when a man’s “work” meant
-chasing over the hills, when men fared hard, and knew little of Nature;
-when fear was the supreme emotion—it is probable that seventy years
-represented a long life. To escape all the chances of death from
-accident and ignorance for so long a time was an achievement, and, in
-this way, doubtless, seventy years came to be regarded as the natural
-period of man’s physical existence.
-
-But with our increasing knowledge, with the extension of means for
-making life easier, with our conquest of Nature, there is no excuse for
-limiting ourselves or our fellows to the same short span. Consequently
-man’s life began to extend over a longer and longer period as the risks
-of living were diminished by civilization. War became a less common
-condition; the very inventions for making war more destructive of life
-helped to make people consider whether disputes could not be more
-wisely settled. The next step was a natural outcome of that reasoning.
-The latest wars have had more casualties and less fatalities; partly
-because the effort has been to incapacitate the fighting-men rather
-than to kill them off. We have begun to see dimly, at least, that the
-taking of life does not settle any question. This leads to a greater
-respect for life, and from respect to preservation is an easy step.
-
-The intelligent man to-day does not make his whole life a mere struggle
-to exist for his “allotted span.” Rather, he aims to preserve and
-prolong his life by exertion and, even more, by repose. He has learned
-that, while it is true that “not enjoyment and not sorrow is our
-destined end or way,” yet to enjoy, in the sense of understanding life
-and living, is to live so that “each to-morrow find us farther than
-to-day.” To enjoy life is to use it wisely; to get the most out of it
-that will make for happiness and development. It will not help to that
-end to worry or lose sleep, because man’s span of life is short. Love
-with your whole heart, and live according to reason, and you will win
-the prize of sleep, and happiness and length of days shall be added
-thereunto.
-
-
-
-
-CHAPTER XLVI
-
-WASTE STEAM
-
-
-If there is one thing more than another for which Americans are noted,
-it is “nervous energy.” To this we attribute our notable achievements
-in science, industry, and literature. To this energy, also, or rather
-to the misuse of it, may be attributed the dyspepsia, the nervous
-headaches, the general “breakdowns,” and the suicides so much more
-prevalent of late years.
-
-An abundant supply of nervous energy is one of the blessings of life,
-it denotes almost unlimited capacity for work and enjoyment. It is the
-steam that drives the engine; and which, under the control of a skilled
-engineer, pulls the train upgrade as well as on the level. It is only
-through ignorance or carelessness that the engine is allowed to run
-wild, and destroys that which it was meant to convey safely.
-
-So with the people who “go to pieces nervously.” There has been an
-unskilled hand on the lever. Through ignorance or carelessness, the
-nervous energy has been badly handled, and the force that should convey
-us safely through life has caused our destruction. We should be as
-careful with our minds as with our machines.
-
-When we find ourselves getting nervous and worried, sleepless, “blue,”
-or dyspeptic; or showing any of the numerous signs of misdirected
-energy, such as short temper or headaches, we should take a day off
-to examine the engine. It is time well spent, as we may thereby learn
-something that will avert a complete breakdown.
-
-If we find that we are not overeating, overworking, or overworrying;
-not feeling animosity, nor suffering from an excessive idea of personal
-importance—if, in fact, there are no fears gnawing our heartstrings nor
-any other large and well-defined cause of trouble, we may well look
-closer for small causes. “The foxes—the little foxes that spoil the
-vines.”
-
-There are often disturbing causes that we fail to notice as disturbing.
-For instance, disorder about us, the habit of stirring everything up
-and throwing everything around when we set to work. The confusion
-communicates itself to our feelings, besides which the uncertainty as
-to where we have put what we want next upsets our nerves.
-
-It is a good plan, when we find ourselves “rattled” or not working
-easily, to stop and clear things up, put everything in order. It is
-marvelous how often that will smooth out the creases both in face and
-temper and make the world look pleasant again.
-
-If that itself proves to be a certain strain or an annoyance, leave the
-whole thing and go out for a while, or take a nap, or even smoke, if
-you do not feel that smoking hurts you. Anything that will distract the
-attention from the seemingly annoying circumstances will relieve the
-pressure on overwrought nerves and allow the system to regain its poise.
-
-At this point it will sometimes serve to put into practice the rule
-that William Pitt, Prime Minister of Great Britain, laid down for
-himself: When overwhelmed with official duties, he divided his work
-into three parts—that which was not worth doing, that which would do
-itself, and that which was quite enough for any man to attempt. Make a
-list of all the things you have to do, then go over that list and make
-it into three. Pick out first the things that could be left undone,
-because not really worth the effort they require. Having settled them,
-you will find your load already lightened.
-
-Next select those things that you want to do, but which somebody else
-could do just as well. Make that list carefully. It is the hardest
-one of the three. It is comparatively easy to decide that a thing we
-may wish to do is not worth the effort it will cost, but it is quite
-another matter to admit that somebody else could do those things just
-as well.
-
-And there is a reason for this feeling apart from mere ordinary
-conceit, although it may only be a more subtle form of
-conceit—self-approbativeness, as the phrenologists call it. It has its
-rise in our belief that, while our way of doing that particular thing
-may be no better than another’s way, yet it is “different,” and we
-long to see the result of that different way. Nevertheless, it may be
-that the best good of all concerned requires that somebody else do that
-thing, and our nervous restlessness is merely a warning for us to omit
-doing it ourselves.
-
-Then, in the things left on the original list, we shall find all that
-one person should undertake, and we shall do them with a zest and ease
-that could not have been ours working in any other way. For myself,
-when all else fails, and none of these devices does away with the
-feeling of being pushed by my work, I close my desk and go for a walk.
-If soothed, I return in an hour or two and take up my work easily;
-otherwise, I leave it all until another day; it saves time in the end.
-Circumstances prevent many persons from doing that: but we can do it,
-in greater or less degree, far oftener than we think.
-
-It is always advisable to stop long enough to find out what is the
-matter. If a good engineer finds his engine running hard, he examines
-it to finds the trouble. If your watch goes irregularly, you take it
-to an expert to find the cause of irregularity. Why should we be less
-careful with our minds?
-
-What is needed is simply obedience to the laws of Nature that we know,
-but the case may be one for the physical culturist, for the mental
-therapeutist, for the moral teacher, or even for the alienist. Where
-common sense fails or is wanting, we should consult an expert before it
-is too late. (See Appendix A.)
-
-
-
-
-CHAPTER XLVII
-
-UNDERSTANDING
-
- Enjoy the honey-heavy dew of slumber;
- Thou hast no figures and no fantasies,
- Which busy care draws in the brains of men;
- Therefore thou sleep’st so sound.
-
- SHAKESPEARE.
-
-
-All unrest and uneasiness, all impatience and disharmony are due to
-some misunderstanding of life and its unity, of its unchanging and
-unchangeable laws. Froebel’s recognition of this principle created his
-idea of education as growth by exercise, the greatest definition of
-training that has yet been given to the world. He says that education
-consists in relating the individual life to the external life, the
-inner to the outer, or, in other words, it consists in getting the
-individual into harmony with the whole of life.
-
-This is the substance of the doctrine of all the great thinkers of the
-world, the essential oneness in the teachings of all the philosophers
-of every race and of all the ages. Each gives expression to the special
-side of this oneness that presented itself most strongly to him, but
-on the plan of life they agree.
-
-Although many of the followers of these great teachers have been able
-to see the beauty of their conceptions, few have been able to transmit
-them as pure and bright as they received them. It is by no means easy
-to avoid interpreting what we hear in a merely personal way. Seldom
-do the “hearers of the Word” have the humility “of the broken and
-empty vessel,” so well expressed in a hymn at one time popular among
-revivalists:
-
- “Empty, that He might fill me
- As forth to His service I go;
- Broken, that so unhindered
- His life through me might flow.”
-
-Instead of that, we have tried to make the truth fit our ideas of
-“personal” life, when we should have made our “personal” life fit the
-truth.
-
-One cannot conceive of the Universe growing weary, of infinity becoming
-exhausted, because material science has shown us that harmonious
-laws govern all life. Scientists have been able to state laws that
-experience has shown to be unfailingly true. For example, take the
-heavenly bodies: through the study and comparison of their motions,
-astronomers have stated laws that apply to all that is known of them,
-and which illustrate the perfection of the solar system. To-day, if
-some asteroid is discovered which seems to move in opposition to known
-laws, no one supposes that the laws are wrong. So impossible is any
-haphazard occurrence in the solar system that astronomers know that
-any disturbance simply shows some existence or activity not hitherto
-observed. They do not doubt the unchangeable universal nature of the
-laws; but they recognize that only lack of knowledge prevents our
-understanding the relation of what we see to the laws that govern it,
-and they bend every effort to the solution of the mystery.
-
-If we but look upon the occurrences of human life with the same
-confidence, there is no cause for worry and uneasiness. Why should
-man chafe? Because of those who do ill? “Fret not thyself because of
-evildoers,” for they, too, have their uses. Every man is in the plan
-of God. It may be that he is here simply to show us something that
-we should not otherwise have seen. Had not someone done the ill and
-made the results known, many men might have made like mistakes and the
-consequences have been much worse than they are. Says Ernest Crosby:
-
- “I thank the kind round-shouldered men
- And treat them with respect
- For teaching me to raise my chin
- And hold myself erect.”
-
-No man can tell how much more he owes to the things that he would
-have made different had he shaped his own life, than to the things he
-regards as good.
-
-Most advances that we accomplish are forced upon us by circumstances
-with which we are discontented, and our happiness consists in
-recognizing that there is, in effect, no such thing as misfortune.
-There is no chance in the world: everything is the result of Energy;
-nothing ever happens by accident. I said once to a woman standing
-beside the coffin of her husband, trying to comfort her and trying
-to teach myself, “You know, this did not happen by chance.” “No,”
-she said, “I know that; if one chance got loose, it would wreck the
-world.” So it would.
-
-You toss up a coin and it seems to you to be chance whether it comes
-down heads or tails. It isn’t chance at all. If one thing happened by
-chance, you would know that it was the end of natural law. Suppose
-that the thing to be tossed were an iron plate, ten feet across by two
-feet thick, then the engineer could figure out just how many pounds of
-powder would turn it once and how many would turn it twice or three
-times; and, if you told him when he had adjusted his charge that it
-was chance which side would come up, he would say that you did not
-understand dynamics. He knows that there is no chance about it; that
-the number of turns depends exactly upon the amount of force, and how
-it is applied. So it is with the tossing of the penny; it may seem to
-be chance to us because we cannot measure or perceive the causes, but
-its fall is as directly and fixedly due to causes as the sinking of an
-ocean-liner.
-
-It is not likely that Charles Dickens would have chosen the hard
-childhood he had if he could have arranged his own life, but there is
-little room to doubt that much of his understanding and sympathy, much
-of the power that made him the novelist of the masses, was due to those
-experiences. Even though he may never have seen during his life how
-necessary those experiences were, nor accepted them philosophically,
-that did not alter their use. The work of the “evildoers” in giving
-Socrates hemlock to drink did not destroy Socrates’ usefulness; the
-death by the cross did not check the spread of the good news the
-Nazarene brought to man.
-
-Men have always stoned the prophets and killed those who would bring
-deliverance. This is an expression of the conservatism which is the
-balance-wheel of the race: if it were not for that, the leaders of the
-people would get so far in advance as to be clear out of sight. But the
-prophecies have been fulfilled, and, step by step, deliverance has been
-won. Moreover, whom one generation destroyed, succeeding generations
-have honored; it is impossible to get the rear rank in line with the
-vanguard. But wherein has evil triumphed or the law of good been set
-aside?
-
-In the study of history we see the persistent progress of the race.
-However slow the march, it has always been from darkness into light,
-from low aims and small ideas to higher purposes and larger thoughts.
-Each nation has contributed something to the sum of that progress. Not
-only have they had glimpses at their best of better things, but even at
-their worst they have caused other nations to see and avoid like errors
-or cruelties. In this way the civilized and the savage have both helped
-to advance civilization. And, if the blind works of evildoers do not
-triumph over the plans of Good, if they do not even hinder the working
-of the law of universal Good, why should we fret ourselves because of
-them?
-
-But the unrest may be caused by our lack of that worldly success which
-we think would bring us happiness. Of course, if the real desire be
-worldly success, and there is no other way in which we can learn that
-it will not bring happiness, then we must attain worldly success.
-To-day, this demands a resolute will, concentration, a steady nerve,
-and a lack of human sympathy. It is difficult for us to see this in our
-own case when we make worldly success our aim, but, if we examine the
-career of any “successful” man, we shall see how true it is.
-
-Nothing is truer of modern business life than that the success of one
-involves the failure or seeming failure of many. We have but to look
-around at the few who are acclaimed by the world as successful business
-men and the many who toil for a bare subsistence, to find the proof
-of this. To succeed, a man must first resolve to succeed, and must
-concentrate all his powers to that end. He must have iron nerves so
-that unexpected good-or ill-fortune may not upset him, and he must so
-steel his heart that he may not see the needs or hear the groans of his
-suffering fellows, if to hear or heed would interfere with his purpose.
-
-After men have attained worldly success, they sometimes give liberally
-to charity and public purposes. Nobody has yet revealed how much of
-that giving is atonement for the half-remembered times when some heart
-was hardened, some ear deafened, and some hand tight closed against the
-cry of the needy. Some rich men unhappily become so hard of heart, so
-bound by the habit of refusing, that giving becomes an impossibility.
-
-Now worry and unrest upset the nerve, disturb the concentration, and
-keep alive at least one phase of human sympathy—that which we call
-irritation. We do not usually regard irritation as an expression of
-sympathy, but that is just what it is. Irritation towards our fellows
-is an indication that we cannot rid ourselves of the knowledge that
-they have claims upon us. It is an evidence that we do not understand
-them, or that we are not in harmony with them. That may be because
-their aims are so different from ours that they are a standing rebuke
-to our selfishness, or because their aims are so similar to ours that
-they become a threat to us. In either event they are forced upon our
-attention, and we are unable to forget them. We are not able to crush
-them ruthlessly if they stand in our way, for to do so causes us pain
-and dissatisfaction, and prevents our joy in our success. Sometimes,
-when the pain and dissatisfaction become keen enough, they may even
-turn us from our purpose, and thus destroy our chance of worldly
-success.
-
-Thus worry and unrest defeat the very thing we are aiming at, and
-leave us out of harmony with the laws governing the accomplishment
-of our purpose. Even in business and in matters of health, that rest
-which comes from a cool, steady purpose, undisturbed by fretfulness or
-impatience, is the main factor of success.
-
-
-
-
-CHAPTER XLVIII
-
-THE SUPERSTITION OF FEAR
-
- Fear of Death thus dies in senseless sleep.
-
- BEAUMONT.
-
-
-Primitive man feared thunder, and, being unable to explain it, made a
-god of it, offered sacrifices to it in the hope of averting the harm it
-might do. Fear has perverted many religions. What man feared he first
-crouched before in helpless terror, and afterwards knelt before in
-wonder and worship. In the early days of the race he looked upon every
-new or strange thing with terror, because he did not understand its
-connection with the things he knew.
-
-Man first knew himself as a physical creature with certain needs and
-cravings that must be gratified if he were to live at all. He did not
-at first realize that the presence of another person would make life
-easier and more secure for him; rather, he feared that every other
-would injure him. Later, as men formed themselves into groups, clans
-and tribes, each recognized the interests of the immediate group as of
-supreme importance, but feared the other groups. This was the origin
-of “Honor thy father and thy mother, that thy days may be long in the
-land.” Those families that obeyed their natural leader, the patriarch,
-held together and survived; the others were separated and destroyed.
-The early records of the Jews are scarcely more than a chronicle of
-the wars of a coherent race against various other tribes inhabiting
-that part of Asia, together with the lessons to be drawn from its
-experience. Even in the vast new continent of America, different tribes
-of Indians roving its plains looked upon other tribes with distrust
-and hatred, and made war upon them. There was plenty of land; animal
-life abounded; there was nothing in the aims and pursuits of one tribe
-that was necessarily injurious to any other, yet apprehension and the
-superstition of enmity kept them apart.
-
-The world has not yet got rid of this old superstition. In this modern
-Christian era there is scarcely a civilized nation which does not
-keep itself in readiness to attack its neighbor. All the peace the
-nations yet know is an armed peace, so that even when we cry, “Peace,
-peace!” we know “there is no peace,” because man does not yet trust
-his fellowman. He is fearful of him, not only as encroaching upon his
-actual territory, but he resents his competition even in the making of
-the tools and goods that civilized life demands.
-
-We erect tariff walls, that the people of other countries may not
-easily sell to us the goods they make, forgetting that, even without
-those walls, they could not sell their goods to us, if we did not want
-them. For, in free buying and selling, the desire must be mutual, else
-there will be no exchange.
-
-In all the relations of the most modern civilized society the effect of
-this distrust, of one toward another, is plain to be seen. Even those
-who devote their lives to preaching the doctrine of the gentle Nazarene
-do not always grasp the full significance of that doctrine. The city
-of Toledo, Ohio, is blessed with a mayor who has lost all distrust in
-man (or perhaps he never learned it) and, in his efforts to administer
-civic affairs on a basis of love and understanding, he is finding his
-strongest opponents in some of the preachers of the community. Such is
-the blinding effect of misunderstanding the unity of all life.
-
-It cannot, therefore, be a matter of surprise to the student of
-present-day affairs that his ancestors were slow to learn about other
-groups what their still earlier ancestors had learned of individuals.
-As the circle of man’s interests enlarged, including more and more
-fellow-creatures, he began to come more and more into harmonious
-relations with the Universe. Out of his personal experience he began
-to perceive the mutual interests and the underlying oneness of human
-life, and, through that perception, some have now begun to realize the
-oneness of all life.
-
-This is the road along which man must travel to reach harmony, and
-harmony is rest. It is living in accord with the universal law which
-regulates the growth and development of all things as well as their
-activities. To the undeveloped savage the whole material universe, so
-far as he could see it, was a jumble of inharmonious and unrelated
-things—he saw no relation between the different bodies in the heavens
-as they circled in their orbits; each created thing seemed to have its
-separate existence, which had to be maintained without regard to any
-other form of life. But science has shown us that the heavenly bodies,
-however huge or remote, are all parts of one great system, under one
-perfect law. We know now that, instead of the earth being the center of
-the universe, round which all the stars, suns, moons, and other bodies
-revolve, it is itself but a tiny unit in a tremendous system of systems.
-
-All of these bodies have been circling in their orbits for untold
-millions of years, unaffected by the fact that no man knew of them.
-It is not too much to expect that they will continue to perform their
-circlings according to those same laws even after science has taught us
-all it is possible to discover. Man may profit from his knowledge of
-universal laws, but he cannot alter them.
-
-And yet the man of average intelligence even to-day feels that things
-universal in relation to humanity and its needs are at “sixes and
-sevens,” and that his anxiety and feverish activity are needed to alter
-or better them. He still sees men as separate beings with interests
-that clash.
-
-It is this failure to understand that every life is bound up for good
-with all other lives which leads us to worry about our “personal”
-affairs, and thus to miss the rest that clear understanding would
-bring.
-
-
-
-
-CHAPTER XLIX
-
-IMAGINARY FEARS
-
- O soft embalmer of the still midnight.
-
- KEATS.
-
-
-When we learn to confine our attention to “the things that are quite
-enough for any man to attempt,” we shall find that there is little real
-ground for worry or fretting in our daily life. It is a fact that,
-if our work wearies or exhausts us, either we are doing the wrong
-thing or else doing it in the wrong way. For the Spirit of Life is
-no taskmaster. It is we who make this world a daily grind. It is not
-naturally a “vale of tears” nor a “wilderness of woe.”
-
- “Joy upon joy and gain upon gain
- Are the destined rights of my birth,”
-
-and we may all have those rights if we claim them as our own. Worry
-is a disease that some people enjoy as much as some others enjoy
-invalidism. There are some people who can hardly speak and think of
-anything but their physical ailments; they never recall the mornings
-when they felt strong and vigorous, the nights they slept soundly, but
-only the days when they had uncomfortable sensations of weakness or
-distress, and the nights when sleep was somewhat broken. And you will
-notice that they will say they “did not sleep well” when they mean
-that they did not sleep much. We may always sleep _well_, even though
-we do not sleep much.
-
-There are other people who, though they do not weary us with accounts
-of their bodily symptoms, tell us always of their cares. They revel in
-tales of distress which shall go to show how much more oppressed they
-are than their fellows. They take their worries as the healthy farmer
-takes his food, eagerly, and would be distinctly upset if anything
-happened to interfere with their enjoyment of them. If they are going
-somewhere, they worry lest it should rain, or lest something unforeseen
-should happen to prevent the expedition. It is the same old story, they
-want their “own way.” They cannot conceive of a disappointment being a
-blessing in disguise; they know of nothing so hard to be borne as the
-setting aside of a passing desire.
-
-For such as these life is full of “bitter disappointments”; cares and
-worries naturally fall to their lot; the sun seldom shines for them,
-and even when it does they think they can note the spots upon it,—while
-the rain falls so heavily and so frequently that it makes runnels over
-their whole plan of life, reducing it to a scene of desolation. And all
-the time the sun is shining, and joys are awaiting them did they but
-look in the right direction. They are “pulling the wrong string,” as
-it were. A little child kept calling to his mother that he could not
-find what he was seeking, because he could not “make the light come
-on.” His mother wisely replied: “You are probably pulling the wrong
-string, Harold. Pull the other.” The moment he did so the electric
-light flooded the room, and the child found what he sought. It had lain
-right to his hand all the time, but he did not know to pull the right
-string. Our heart’s desire lies just as close to us.
-
-Many a person who is always having trouble, who is worried and uneasy,
-longing for rest and comfort but never finding it; to whom “life is
-a dreary puzzle scarcely worth the solving,” is simply “pulling the
-wrong string,” the string of self-will, of separateness. His soul is
-darkened by his refusal to turn on the light, and the shadow covers the
-whole of his life.
-
-The darkness is filled with imaginary terrors. We people the corners
-with hobgoblins that do not exist, and that in our hearts we know could
-not exist. Little Bessie had for several nights cried out in terror
-after she had been put to bed, so that her mother was compelled to go
-to her. At first she would not say what had frightened her, but at
-last the story came out.
-
-“I was thinking how frightened I should be if there was a bogey-man
-in the closet and he should suddenly put his head out and make faces
-at me.” “But, child,” said her mother, “you know there is no such
-thing as a bogey-man, so he could not be in the closet, nor make faces
-at you.” “Yes, mother, I know that,” answered the child, slowly;
-“but, mother, _if_ there was a bogey-man, and he did get into my
-closet, and if he did put out his head and make faces at me, wouldn’t
-I be awfully frightened? Well, it’s _that_ that makes me scream.” And
-often the thing that makes us “scream” has no more existence in fact
-than Bessie’s bogey-man. We get to turning things over in our minds,
-dwelling upon dire possibilities until they become actual to us, and we
-get as much pain and suffering from them as we should if they were real.
-
-It would puzzle ourselves, if we gave the matter attention, to discover
-why we are more given to worrying than to rejoicing, if it is not that
-we misunderstand life and its purposes.
-
-Consider life just on its physical side, and we shall see, as the
-Creator saw when he looked upon it, that it is all very good. There are
-more sunny days in the year than stormy ones; there is more growing
-time than decaying time, for spring, summer, and autumn comprise three
-parts of the year, and growth continues through them all; the moon
-shines always somewhere, and “the stars come nightly to the sky.” The
-bright-colored blossoms show more than the somber-hued; more birds sing
-sweetly than croak harshly, and even the croak melts into the symphony
-as a needed note. The purely material world points to joy and gladness
-rather than to sorrow and repining.
-
-Then, when we come to man, we find that he has more strength than
-weakness, more health than sickness, more power than inability, else
-man had not survived the ages. Moreover, man must have more capacity
-for enjoyment than for sorrow, else he would abandon life in weariness,
-or at best he would forget how to laugh; the mere animal does not
-laugh, that is one of man’s accomplishments.
-
-Man has also more desire for knowledge than for ease, else he would
-never have penetrated into the secrets and mysteries of Nature; man’s
-strong aspirations surmount his groveling tendencies, else he had never
-come up out of savagery into the light and development of kinship with
-the high gods.
-
-Then, why should we give way to repining? All things point to the
-apostolic truth that “Weeping may endure for a night, but joy cometh
-in the morning.” And always the morning comes. Moreover, the darkest
-night is seldom starless if we look up intently enough. If we blind our
-eyes with tears, we cannot see the light even when the horizon is rosy
-with the rising sun. Better by far is it to feel with Browning:
-
- “How good is man’s life,
- The mere living! How fit to employ
- All the heart and the soul and the senses forever in joy.”
-
-
-
-
-CHAPTER L
-
-ILL SUCCESS
-
- “And comfortress of Unsuccess
- To wish the dead good-night.”
- KIPLING’S “True Romance.”
-
-
-If we aim at worldly success, thinking that thereby we shall be able to
-do more for mankind and be more useful, we may defeat our own purpose
-by worry and anxiety. The present moment is all that any man has in
-which to come into agreement with his fellows.
-
-If for lack of understanding he spends that moment in worry and
-unrest, he makes himself and everybody else more or less unhappy,
-thereby destroys his own usefulness, and proves his unfitness to gain
-success. But it may be that he is deceived as to his motive; he may
-desire success really for the satisfaction of winning against his less
-fortunate fellows.
-
-Why should we desire worldly success to enable us to help our fellows?
-No amount of benevolence or philanthropy can atone for the selfishness,
-inhumanity and the greed necessary to acquire great wealth under modern
-conditions. The widow’s mite or the cup of cold water given from
-moment to moment is of greater value than the millions bestowed upon
-charity as a sop to one’s conscience, or as a pacifier of public clamor.
-
-There is a degree of satisfaction in giving _all_ that can never come
-from giving a portion of superabundance. We never hear of a very rich
-man giving all that he hath, over and above a comfortable, or even a
-luxurious, living. His giving hardly requires the sacrifice of even a
-whim. How can a man like Rockefeller, with an admitted income of nearly
-a dollar every second, be generous? How much would he have to give in
-order to feel it?—and what mischief would he not do in giving such a
-sum! The “luxury of giving” can never be his, for that is the result
-of giving at the expense of our daily desires. The widow who cast in
-her mite enjoyed the luxury of giving, and many still give in that way.
-This gift of somebody’s mite incited the giving of millions.
-
-But it is not possible that the gift of millions should bring the giver
-much happiness, if it brings any. There is too much publicity and
-display in such a gift; it is noised abroad from press and platform,
-and creates a new distress in the mind of the giver. The giver knows
-that unscrupulous, undeserving persons or causes will now lay siege
-to a share of his wealth, because of the notoriety his great gift has
-brought him. Some are so oppressed with appeals that they have to
-appoint committees to give away the money. There must be about as much
-satisfaction in that as in having a committee to kiss the women you
-love.
-
-Besides this, great benefactions cause uneasiness, lest they be
-misapplied or unwisely distributed, or lest the glory may be eclipsed
-by some other millionaire giving a larger sum to a more popular cause.
-Thus donations become a source of unrest and worriment, and the donor’s
-last state is worse than his first. The giver of the mite is generally
-unknown of the crowd, sometimes unknown even of the one to whom he
-gives, so that his joy comes from the giving, and cannot be taken from
-him. To him alone is it true that “the gift is to the giver” and that
-“it is more blessed to give than to receive.” If there is no real joy
-to be had from giving of great wealth, why should we desire to have it,
-or fret ourselves that we do not win it? Neither to acquire wealth nor
-to possess it can bring happiness or peace. We have seen how great is
-the price we must pay to get great riches, and it is easy to see why
-their possession cannot bring peace or happiness.
-
-Man has a limited number of wants, and there is an end even to whims.
-When all of these have been satisfied, what is left? The ordinary man
-must give time, skill, thought, and labor to satisfy his needs, and
-from the effort he gets a large measure of joy and satisfaction. Even
-if he never gets what he is after, the effort has given him pleasure,
-strengthened his purpose, and developed his whole nature. But the
-wealthy man is denied this natural satisfaction. He does not even
-have to seek what he wants; servants do that for him; he speaks and
-the thing is done. For him there is no joyous effort; no increase of
-pleasure in the very delay of fulfillment; no sense of achievement when
-he gets what he desires. For this reason he soon wearies, and, having
-run the whole gamut of pleasures, and exhausted his idle fancies, he
-becomes a prey to ennui, has no object in life, and finds no delight
-in the days. It could not be otherwise. As an old servant in my family
-once said, “If the rich were happy, we should know there was no God.”
-“How hardly shall a rich man enter into the kingdom of heaven,” said
-Jesus; meaning thereby that the possession of wealth destroys our
-sympathy with our poorer brethren and prevents a man from seeing his
-true relation to those who have it not; makes it difficult for him to
-recognize his oneness with all mankind, and so cuts him off from that
-heaven of love and peace on earth that can come only from agreement of
-his own life with the life of others outside his circle.
-
-If we are worried or ill at ease for any other cause, such as
-ill-health, disappointed affections, unsatisfied desires, or from any
-of the innumerable causes to which we attribute our ill, we have but
-to examine them to find that in every instance the underlying error is
-the same. It is that we think of our separate interests, that we are
-for self; that “me” has a deeper significance to our mind than “us”
-that the “I” blots out the “thou.” All worry, all unrest comes from
-self-seeking, from the feeling of separateness rather than of oneness;
-from an inharmonious attitude towards life and its underlying verities.
-
-“Seek ye first the kingdom of God,” said the Teacher, “and all these
-things”—material things, food and clothes that he had been speaking
-of—“shall be added unto you.” Now God is love, and the kingdom of
-God is universal love, the love that knows no separateness; therefore
-let not your heart be troubled, neither let it be afraid. Believe in
-God. The man who seeks first the wide Universal Peace does not worry
-nor fret. He has, by that very seeking, put himself in tune with the
-Infinite, and he finds that the sounds which have seemed to him like
-harsh discords are, to his listening ear, blended into harmony. He has
-heard the “sweetest carol ever sung” and nothing can drown its melody.
-With that song in his ears he can “run and never be wearied, he can
-walk and not faint.” He loses his feverish impatience, for “he that
-believeth shall not make haste”; he sees himself in every man and every
-man in himself; he has found rest for his soul.
-
-When this peace reigns within, the seeming ills of life do not disturb
-us. We are not conscious of ungratified desires, and in this lies the
-truth of the promise—“all things shall be added unto you.” For, if man
-is not conscious of any ungratified want or desire, then, though he be
-poor in this world’s goods and entirely unknown, he is richer by far
-than the multi-millionaire who is compelled to heap silver upon gold,
-or the pushing politician whose thirst for fame can never be slaked.
-He is in harmony with the Universe, he has allied himself with moral
-gravitation, and, going with its force, he is upheld and supported, so
-that he has rest now and is neither worried nor afraid.
-
-
-
-
-CHAPTER LI
-
-SOCIAL UNREST
-
- Peace, peace, thou over-anxious, foolish heart;
- Rest, ever-seeking soul; calm, mad desires;
- Quiet, wild dreams—this is the time of sleep,
- Hold her more close than life itself. Forget
- All the excitements of the day, forget
- All problems and discomforts. Let the night
- Take you unto herself, her blessèd self,
- Peace, peace, thou over-anxious, foolish heart;
- Rest, ever-seeking soul; calm, mad desires;
- Quiet, wild dreams—this is the time of sleep.
-
- LEOLYN LOUISE EVERETT.
-
-
-Inquiry into the causes and the cure of sleeplessness leads us
-inevitably to one conclusion: there must be peace of mind, harmonious
-action and interaction of mind and body in order to command the most
-refreshing sleep. A man may not know which of the many theories of
-sleep is correct—indeed, he may not know that there are any theories
-about it, but, if he lives a normal physical life and is at peace with
-the world, he is likely to sleep well.
-
-Since health of body, mind, and soul is essential to our best
-development, and since sleep, restful sleep, is essential to such
-health, it would seem that such sleep is one of the things which
-rightly belong to every individual. And, if to individuals, then to
-groups of individuals, to nations, to the whole race. The race is
-subject to the same influence as the individual, and, since the chief
-cause of the unrest of individuals is their inharmonious relations
-towards one another, so the chief cause of the unrest of the race is
-its inherent discord.
-
-Underlying the antagonisms of men to men is the question of
-economics—“the science of ... living well for the state, the
-family, and the individual,” as the Standard Dictionary defines
-it. While the question of how he shall sustain his mere physical
-existence—obtain the food, clothes, and shelter so essential to
-his maintenance—occupies all a man’s thought and energy, he does
-not readily turn toward the consideration of his deeper life. He
-feels that every man is his enemy, ready and willing to take from
-him, either by superior sharpness, fraud, or force the opportunity
-of supplying his needs.
-
-So long as conditions lead anyone to adopt this attitude towards his
-fellows, he is not apt to give much time or thought to discovering
-his proper relations toward them. Forces stronger than any number of
-individuals, acting separately, may drive men into combinations— such
-as labor organizations among the masses, or large corporations among
-the privileged classes—until we find a sort of spurious co-operation
-taking the place of individual effort.
-
-But this co-operation is based upon the necessity of combining to
-oppose and crush, not upon the desire to avoid friction and bring about
-harmonious relations between men. Wherever either labor or capital
-organizes to protect itself from the oppression of the other and to
-dictate terms to it, that other in its turn organizes to protect
-itself and to crush the opposing power. Neither party to the struggle
-sees its dependence upon the other. Capital forgets that labor called
-it into existence, that without labor there had been no capital, and
-that should labor cease capital would soon disappear. Labor does not
-see that capital is its own product, drawn from the land and used to
-enable men to produce more wealth. And neither sees that the object
-of producing wealth is not wealth for its own sake, but that man may,
-through its use, develop himself to an ever higher state.
-
-It is scarcely possible that men should see this under present economic
-conditions; how, then, can it be possible for men to understand their
-relations to one another or the advantages of harmony?
-
-And, if economic conditions destroy man’s relations to man, how much
-more completely do they destroy man’s relation to the higher life,
-to Nature or God? Even in his bitterest struggles with his fellows,
-man recognizes that he and those who oppose him are alike victims
-of circumstances and must fight. The resentment which he feels is
-less toward individuals than to the circumstances which make them
-antagonists when they should be coworkers, and he does not see that the
-circumstances are of man’s own creating.
-
-So long as he regards these conditions as natural, ordained by some
-power outside himself, he cannot be expected to feel drawn towards
-closer relations with that power. While he has to watch his chance in
-the battle of life, he can hardly see that to get in harmony with the
-laws of the Universe, to recognize his oneness with all life, is to
-leave struggle and unrest behind. If life is nothing but struggle, he
-wonders how any attitude can destroy or obviate struggling.
-
-Viewed from his standpoint, he is right. If, as man progresses, the
-desire to live well strengthens and deepens, and if this desire can be
-gratified only by waging relentless war against men and conditions,
-then no study of the relations of man to man or of man to life can
-lead to anything but greater cunning and more destructive methods of
-opposition. As the individual finds no way to fulfill his desires
-without fighting his neighbor, so the nation learns of no way to
-advance except through crushing other nations. There can rarely be
-true internal peace for the individual and no true rest and healthy
-growth for the nation while unjust economic conditions are maintained.
-
-Wherever an individual feels the pressure of economic conditions too
-keenly he loses what little poise he may have had. He becomes restless
-and sleepless and the whole tone of his mind and body is lowered. Where
-the distress from such pressure becomes general, there the nation
-loses tone; quarrels are readily picked with other nations, and war is
-resorted to as a means of reducing population and of destroying all
-forms of wealth, so that a new demand may be created and the economic
-pressure for a time be lessened. These conditions recur again and
-again at longer or shorter intervals, and always the same futile means
-of meeting them is adopted. Man so little understands life that he
-has not learned that harmony with the laws of the Universe underlies
-his economic relations as well as his physical relations. If he knew
-this, he would know that the distress and dissatisfaction common to
-all nations could come only from the violation of natural laws, and he
-would begin to search out those laws. Men for a long time held false
-ideas of the laws of the solar system, and exhausted ingenious devices
-and systems to explain its phenomena. Then they began to discover
-underlying laws which explain phenomena more satisfactorily: some of
-those laws were found, and our knowledge of the solar system to-day is
-based upon these sure fundamentals.
-
-It is as possible to make sure of the laws governing our economic
-conditions as of those that govern the solar system. They must lie at
-the root of all things economic and must explain all phenomena that any
-condition of society, whether the most primitive or the most complex,
-can produce. Until these laws are discovered and applied the earth will
-“turn, troubled in sleep,” and men may not know peace.
-
-
-
-
-CHAPTER LII
-
-ECONOMIC REST
-
- Winding up days with toil and nights with sleep.
-
- SHAKESPEARE.
-
-
-There are deep-lying causes of anxiety, unrest, and sleeplessness
-that more or less affect us all: yet, eighteen hundred years ago, One
-cried, “The Kingdom of God is at hand.” Not, to come eventually, or
-to future peoples, but “the Kingdom is at hand.” We have looked over
-a world filled with injustice, for the coming of the kingdom—but we
-have not seen it. What is it that hides “the Kingdom at hand” from our
-eyes? Is it not iniquity? What kind of iniquity? We once had chattel
-slavery, which was denounced as “the sum of all villainies.” We still
-have monopoly of the gift of God, which is the fundamental iniquity.
-For every one of his children a loving father made ample provision
-in the earth, but we have allowed a few to monopolize it all; some
-nine out of every hundred own our earth, and we find that, under such
-circumstances, the laws of God are impracticable; therefore, we say
-“the Kingdom is not a real Kingdom—it is only in men’s minds, only in
-some far-off imaginable day it may be in their hearts.”
-
-The kingdom of God is in our hearts, and, if to-day we will but allow
-all our fellows to share in the bounty of Nature, the kingdom will be
-around us also, here and now.
-
-For there is a divine order, a natural law, obedience to which brings
-its own immediate rewards; disobedience to which involves its own
-punishment. The first order of Nature is that men should derive their
-subsistence from the land and the products of land, provided by an
-all-wise Creator. From what else can we derive it? Does not everything
-we need, from the wheat to the wheel of the watch, come from the earth?
-By many hands, by many processes, through many stages, all forms of
-wealth are obtained by labor from the land. Food, clothing, fuel,
-machinery, buildings, capital are all results of men working on the
-materials of the earth. So it is clear why, when we have allowed men to
-be shut out from that earth, we find ourselves surrounded by poverty
-and misery.
-
-Like all fundamental laws, the law of our economic relations is simple
-and easily understood, even by children. It may be stated thus: food,
-clothes, and shelter, being essential to the maintenance of human life,
-all human creatures have equal need of and, therefore, equal right to
-access to the source of food, clothes, and shelter. This source is the
-earth, and the only method known whereby the earth may be made to yield
-food, clothes, and shelter is by the application of labor to land.
-For, no matter what picture we conjure up, whether it be of the farmer
-tilling the soil, the carpenter building a house, the factory operative
-weaving cloth, the engineer driving the locomotive that draws the
-produce to markets—there we find labor. And, if we try to imagine any
-of these forms of labor as cut off from land, we shall find our very
-concept of labor and of life wiped out.
-
-Everything necessary to life, whether it be the life of the individual,
-the nation, or of the whole race, can be produced by the combination
-of land and labor. Anything that restricts or hampers the application
-of labor to land leads to suffering on the part of those deprived of
-this access. When the government of a new country wants to increase
-population, it offers free land to settlers. It does not say, “If you
-will come to this country, the government will build mills, factories,
-stores, offices, banks, and churches for you”; it says rather, “Here is
-land, come and use it; build for yourselves out of its materials.” All
-other forms of prosperity flow from the application of labor to land,
-and, therefore, it is sufficient to give to men free access to natural
-opportunities. If the government of a country owned all the land
-of that country, it could increase, restrict, or otherwise regulate
-population, and better or worsen the condition of that population by
-the way in which it granted or withheld the land under its control.
-
-This is in effect what government has done. It first bettered
-conditions by allowing free access to land, and then worsened them
-by allowing a few to make the land their private property; this
-appropriation of the land carries with it the power to hold it out of
-use, thus depriving all men of their equal right to the use of the
-earth, the source of supply for all men’s wants. Instead of these
-favored few being made to pay those deprived of the land an equivalent
-for the privilege enjoyed, the disinherited many are compelled to pay a
-premium to the landholder for the opportunity to labor.
-
-When there is a lockout, is it not the pressure of want that brings
-the men back, hat in hand, to the factory door? If one could go to the
-outskirts of this town to cultivate a bit of the unused land, could he
-not hold out till he got all that his labor was worth? And, when he and
-his fellows are offered less, if they could but get at the unused mines
-and quarries and coalfields and factory sites, and vacant lots, they
-would not need to seek an employer at all—they could get credit, if
-needed, and produce for themselves the capital which they now produce
-for others and employ themselves in doing it.
-
-So many evils flow from the fundamental wrong of shutting up the earth,
-that rest, the peace of mind and body that makes for refreshing sleep,
-is to many impossible.
-
-And who that understands would wish it otherwise? Were the power of
-rest and peace universal now, it would be a denial of the very cause
-of rest,—the proper understanding of man’s relations to humanity and
-to life. Until man has adjusted his economic contrivances to the
-underlying laws of a true Social Science, he cannot have national or
-racial rest. The material science, biology, is proving this ethical
-truth. Recently Dr. Woods Hutchinson has shown that it does not take
-even three generations to make a high-class man a “thoroughbred,” as
-he terms it. If good food, light, air, proper clothing, and wholesome
-recreation were extended to the masses, each generation would produce
-its own “thoroughbreds” from the “common people.” He says: “Men
-not only can but do get to be as able, as useful, and as desirable
-citizens for the community, in every possible regard, in one generation
-as they will ever get or are capable of becoming. Give the unspoiled,
-warm-hearted mass of humanity a fair living chance—good food, fresh
-air, sunshine, decent homes, no overwork, plenty of healthful
-amusements—and you will reap a far larger crop not merely of happiness,
-of justice, and of well-being, but also of geniuses, of great men and
-of all leaders and illuminators than any nation can possibly utilize.”
-
-Until the privilege-created aristocracy of other countries and
-plutocracy of this country get off the backs of the people and cease
-to exploit them by monopolies, there can be no complete and permanent
-rest, for the “mania for owning things” possesses the rich, and the
-fear of want makes restlessness for the poor. The burden-bearing masses
-have not yet seen the cause of their burden, even though they feel its
-intolerable weight at times and make efforts to throw it off. All this
-deepens their unrest.
-
-The very oneness of all life will put sound sleep and true rest ever
-beyond the general reach until all are given equal opportunity in
-Nature’s great gift to man, the Earth.
-
-Then the worker, free of the taxes of rent and monopoly, free of
-cut-throat competition forced by monopoly, would have some leisure
-in which to use his brains and cultivate his affections; and
-liberty—moral, intellectual, and economic—would be here.
-
-Was it not something like this which Jesus had in mind when he said
-“the Kingdom of God is at hand”? Did not he say that obedience to
-the laws of the Universe would bring their own immediate and immense
-reward? The kingdom and the peace of God is within our reach, did we
-but realize it.
-
-
-
-
-CHAPTER LIII
-
-“IF HE SLEEP, HE SHALL DO WELL”
-
- Oh! thou best comforter of that sad heart
- Whom Fortune’s spite assails; come, gentle sleep,
- The weary mourner soothe.
-
- MRS. TIGHE.
-
-
-We believe in a ruling Principle of Order in the Universe, in
-accordance with which everything lives and moves—planets, plants, and
-man.
-
-We call this “God,” “the Spirit,” the “Nature of Things,” or by some
-other name, but we find that, in crystal, vegetable, or animal, it
-always works: and we see that it tends forever toward a more harmonious
-arrangement and better relations of the whole system.
-
-There are seeming lapses, where we cannot yet see, in this instance or
-in that, how it will work out; but in the arrangement of the stars,
-the growth of knowledge through experience, and in the history of
-man, we see in the broad view that it does so work out well. Probably
-Mary, certainly the disciples, thought at the time that the death of
-Jesus was a horrible mistake and misfortune. Now we see that it was
-“needful that this one man should die for all the people” and that to
-him, even then, it was no misfortune. The sacrifice of one for many
-is a great principle of life. The development of the earth from chaos
-to fruitfulness, the development of man from brutality to the rule of
-mind, the development of ourselves from single selfishness to the wider
-love, shows that there is a beneficent Force and that “all things work
-together for good.” If each of us considers himself alone, as having
-separate interests, this truth will be obscured; but when we recognize
-that each of us is a part of the whole, as the tongue is a part of the
-body, we see that no part can be favored without injuring the entire
-system.
-
-If we unduly gratify the taste, the tongue is the very first to show
-that the stomach is “out of order,” and this disharmony is felt in the
-whole body.
-
-Sometimes we have done wrong, or have seen others do wrong apparently
-with profit; but the wider view will always show that the way of the
-transgressor is as hard as his heart, that the wicked man is in truth
-the fool. We know that any attempt that man makes to disturb the right
-order for the sake of any separate interest must react upon himself,
-destroying his own happiness as well as the happiness of those about
-him.
-
-Similarly we see that the prophet, the cultivator, the inventor, the
-martyr, the benevolent man, each doing what he is inspired to do, is
-working just as much for all mankind as for himself, that he cannot
-reap the benefit except as others share it. For our good, we are joined
-together in one connected whole, so that no man liveth, or so much as
-dieth, to himself.
-
-We see how the Spirit makes “even the wrath of men to praise him” that
-the tyranny of a king was necessary to drive out colonists to proclaim
-liberty, and the fierce rivalry of nations in armament is needed to
-usher in a Court of International Peace. Since that is so, since we
-know that in great or universal affairs the eternal purposes cannot be
-interfered with, why should we think that it fails to work in our own
-little interests?
-
-We see beautiful, symmetrical shells and well-adapted organs in
-creatures so small that we know of their existence only through
-high-power microscopes. In them we find the same rule of law, the same
-adaptation to supreme ends that we find in the measureless suns and in
-the measureless souls of men.
-
-Accordingly, when what seems evil “happens,” as we say, to us, upon
-what principle can we conclude that this is an exception, that in this
-case something has occurred that ought not to have occurred? If one
-thing went wrong in the divine intent, it would show a limit to the
-rule of Good. We know that there can be no such limit.
-
-It is not fatalism to believe that the same holy order rules over us,
-for each of us and each of our efforts is a part of the divine plan,
-and a means of carrying it out. We should strive for those things that
-seem to us desirable and good; although we may not have success, as
-we call it, so kind is the constitution of things that the effort to
-direct things right dulls the pain of finding that the event shapes
-itself in a way that we do not like.
-
-We are threatened, perhaps, with what seems a horrible disaster: why,
-the very derivation of the word disaster refers to the influence which
-the stars are supposed to have upon our destinies. Some power there is
-that controls those destinies, in spite of our human limitations of
-time and space. Who would take the job, though he had the power, of
-controlling even the material world, arranging the growth of plants,
-the rise and fall of nations, the birth and waning of the stars?
-
-Yet we do wish to assume just such Omnipotence and Omniscience in our
-personal affairs; to say that this possession must not, shall not slip
-from me, this one must not die. And, if this that is so dear does go
-away, then in that one instance, because it concerns us, we refuse to
-admit that that instance is no exception to the rule of Love, or to
-recognize the kind watchfulness of Him that, keeping Israel, slumbers
-not nor sleeps.
-
-And yet the loss hurts, and the fear of it hurts still more, with a
-pain that seems past endurance—it hurts, and for ages long it has been
-necessary that we should have just such pain in order that we may make
-the efforts that contribute our part to the progress of the world.
-
-But some of us do not in our hearts believe in a beneficent Order of
-the Universe. We think that some persons may seize what they want,
-regardless of others, and yet no evil come to them. Even if that be
-so, still it is wise to act so as to gain the most happiness and,
-therefore, to accommodate ourselves to the Nature of Things.
-
-If we could but leave out the unreasonable self-pity and get into our
-hearts, as knowledge that is a part of ourselves, this understanding
-of the goodness and the loving kindness of God, we should be as gods
-ourselves, seeing the end from the beginning and recognizing that,
-success or failure, loss or gain, life or death, the times are in his
-hands, and it is all very good. And our hearts should not be troubled,
-nor our rest disturbed.
-
-
-
-
-CHAPTER LIV
-
-CONCLUSION
-
- When the shining day doth die,
- Sweet is sleep.
-
- DORA READ GOODALE.
-
-
-We have finished our long inquiry, and it has brought us to thoughts
-and perhaps to conclusions for which we did not look. Such is the
-leading of the Spirit, into ways that we know not of.
-
- “So read I this—and as I try
- To write it clear again
- I find a second finger lie
- Above mine on the pen.”
-
-Much of the ground we have merely passed over, it may be hurriedly, but
-we have seen a promised land of Peace, and, wherever the soles of our
-feet have trodden, the land shall be given to us and to our children
-for an inheritance—if we will.
-
-Now, once again, dear reader—dear, for, in striving and in helping each
-other to get a clear view of these important matters, we become dear to
-each other—try these things.
-
-If you have read and merely approved or disapproved, you will get
-little good from the reading. You remember the pathetically comic story
-of the little boy who was asked if his father was a Christian:
-
-“Yes,” he said, “pa is a Christian; but he does not work much at it.”
-That man might more hopefully have been an infidel. You must put all
-that you can accept into practice if it is to be of any use.
-
-We have found that what we call body and mind and soul are so closely
-bound together that no one of them can be well or ill independently of
-the others. We divide them in our thought and speech; but we cannot
-find any line of separation. Every state joins on to the next one:
-mineral and vegetable and animal are composed of the same elements
-which pass from one state to another. The silex and the lime are taken
-up to make the wheat hard, we eat wheat and these elements pass into
-our bones, and, when our bodies return to Mother Earth, the rootlets
-take them up again to run the round once more.
-
-So the body and mind and soul are all one Life. There are no divisions
-in Nature. The form differs, but the essence is uniform. We classify
-for the sake of convenience and of clear statement. As Sir Oliver
-Lodge says, in “The Survival of Man”—“Boundaries and classifications
-must be recognized as human artifices, but for practical purposes
-distinctions are necessary”; but the philosopher never loses sight of
-the fundamental fact that each animal, flying-fish and whale, seal and
-polar bear, bat and bird, can be classified only by seizing on some
-acquired characteristic, such as the temperature of the blood, the
-method of birth, or the structure of the bones. These mark the animal
-as belonging to an order.
-
-We see, then, that all are One, different manifestations of the
-Universal Life, which must be understood and treated as a whole to see
-and avail ourselves of the Universal Harmony. Accordingly we find that
-we must work with Nature if she is to bring forth abundantly, of bodily
-or of spiritual things, to satisfy our desires. Only in the sweat of
-our faces do we absorb the full comfort and strength of the bread of
-life.
-
-Whatever you have willingly received, willingly give to others. Only
-when you cast the seed, this your mental bread, upon the fertilizing
-waters, shall it return to you in the harvest after many days.
-
- * * * * *
-
-What I have written, I have written as much for myself as for you: if
-it were not so, it would be useless both to you and to me. We must go
-up each for himself and take the strongholds of our own Ignorance and
-Distrust and Fear. Let no one think that he can get life by merely
-reading these words of life.
-
-Try these things for yourself—teach these things to your other selves;
-breathe them in and live them out. Open your mind and enlarge your
-heart so that the Spirit may be able to bless you and keep you with
-him, and to be kind to you, and to lift up the Light of his countenance
-upon you and give you
-
-
- PEACE.
-
-
-
-
-APPENDICES AND BIBLIOGRAPHY
-
-
-Some matters of interest mainly to students of sleep phenomena have
-been mentioned in the text and put in these appendices. In this way the
-general reader is saved the trouble of skipping in the body of the text.
-
-Appendix “A” contains some medical information on the subject of
-Insomnia and sleep-inducing drugs.
-
-Appendix “B” and “C” have been translated from the Latin by A. T.
-Craig especially for use in “The Gift of Sleep.” They are of value
-chiefly as showing the attitude of the ancients towards this natural
-function.
-
-Appendix “D” gives some provisional conclusions based on a
-Questionnaire on Sleep. The returns are as yet incomplete.
-
-
-
-
-APPENDIX A
-
-
-The “Dictionary of Psychological Medicine” (1892), giving the
-terms used in medical psychology with the symptoms, treatment, and
-pathology of insanity. Two vols. Edited by D. Hack Tuke, M.D., LL.D.,
-Examiner in Mental Psychology in the University of London; lecturer on
-Psychological Medicine, etc., says:
-
-LOSS OF SLEEP AS A CAUSE AND CONSEQUENCE OF INSANITY: Insomnia is the
-indication of a morbid condition. It is also, when prolonged, something
-more. Loss of sleep may frequently be a cause, or one of several
-causes, of mental disorder. To remove it is therefore of the greatest
-consequence in the early treatment of the insane. _In a large number of
-instances it is doubtless the consequence and not the cause of mental
-trouble._ The agony of mind associated with melancholia, or the rapid
-flow of ideas in acute mania, may render sleep an almost unattainable
-boon, and in these cases it requires great discrimination to decide
-when, if at all, to administer hypnotics. (P. 1173.)
-
-REMEDIES KNOWN AS SOMNIFACIENTS, SOPORIFICS, HYPNOTICS, AND NARCOTICS:
-At the outset we must put the question, Is there a distinction between
-hypnotics and narcotics? Dujardin-Beaumetz answers in the affirmative.
-He holds that for the drug to be hypnotic it must imitate the natural
-condition of sleep by effecting a lowered intra-cranial pressure, and
-that drugs which, though bringing about unconsciousness, do not lower
-cerebral pressure, or which increase it, cannot claim to be hypnotics.
-On this line he separates chloral as a hypnotic from opium as a
-narcotic ... in the different forms of artificial or drugged sleep it
-is probable that these two factors—quantity of blood, including blood
-pressure, and quality of blood, do each play a part. (P. 1129.)
-
-Medical science has been able so far to do little for sleeplessness,
-except to call it “Insomnia.” INSOMNIA: Loss of sleep has been
-classified under various heads by writers on wakefulness. Thus
-German-Sée has made no less than nine divisions:
-
-a—dolorous insomnia.
-
-b—digestive.
-
-c—cardiac and dyspnoeal insomnia.
-
-d—cerebros-spinal, neurotic insomnia comprising lesions of encephalon,
-general paralysis, acute and chronic mania, hysteria, hypochondriasis.
-
-e—psychic insomnia (emotional and sensational).
-
-f—insomnia of cerebral and physical fatigue.
-
-g—genito-urinary insomnia.
-
-h—febrile, infectious, autotoxic insomnia.
-
-i—toxic insomnia (coffee, tea, alcohol).[10]
-
-[10] Tuke’s “Dictionary of Psychological Medicine,” vol. i., p. 703.
-
-Among the causes of insomnia those of a predisposing character are the
-female sex, old age, nervous temperament, intellectual pursuits.
-
-Of exciting causes may be enumerated organic or functional diseases
-of the brain, worry, anxiety, grief, and bodily pain; noise, if not
-monotonous, fever, coffee, tea, etc.
-
-Among the insane, insomnia is one of the most frequent symptoms,
-except in chronic dementia. In melancholia it is the most distressing
-accompaniment of the disorder, and is especially marked in the early
-morning.
-
-A careful analysis of the conditions or causes of insomnia has
-been made by Dr. Folsom (U. S.). The principal ones may be briefly
-enumerated as follows: Habit, reflex causes, as indigestion,
-genito-urinary disorders; autotoxic causes, as gout, lithæmia,
-syphilis, habitual constipation; anæmia, vaso-motor changes,
-neurasthenia, hallucinations of sight or hearing, astigmatism—the
-strain of the eye which in health may be unnoticed, producing “in
-states of debility, headache, dizziness, spasmodic muscular action or
-wakefulness” and the neurotic temperament.[11]
-
-[11] Tuke’s “Dictionary of Psychological Medicine,” vol. i., pp. 703-4.
-
-
-
-
-APPENDIX B
-
-ABSTRACT FROM ARTICLE: “LUMINOUS SLEEP” By P. ARUNOCHALAM
-
-
-Deep sleep is a sleep of darkness, that is, the sleep of the nerves,
-and the utter relaxation of the body. Its refreshment is due to absence
-of thought.
-
-Is there a sleep of light, a luminous sleep, in which, while there is
-absence of thought, there is not darkness and oblivion, but perfect
-consciousness? To suppose this did not seem irrational to the Greeks.
-(An instance is cited of the abstracted moods of Socrates, Sympos:
-174-5.) (Further citations of this eccentricity of Socrates are in: The
-Tamil Sage; Charmides; Phaedrus; The Republic; also Tennyson, “The
-Ancient Sage.”)
-
-This reality, sleep that is a sort of abstraction from the bodily
-condition, is pure consciousness of spirit, “Luminous sleep,” an
-intellectual and spiritual condition as contrasted with physical sleep.
-To the general aspects of the genius and life of Ancient Greece,
-to its philosophy of the reality of pure abstraction, of absolute
-knowledge and the possibility of attaining it, such a theory would seem
-reasonable.
-
-Dr. Jowett is cited as maintaining that pure abstraction is mere
-negation.
-
-
-
-
-APPENDIX C
-
-THESE CLASSICAL, THOUGH ENTIRELY A PRIORI, THEORIES OF SLEEP ARE NOT
-WITHOUT INTEREST
-
-SLEEP AND WAKING
-
-By GIOVANNI ARGENTERIO (A.D. 1556)
-
-
-PREFACE
-
-That it may well be difficult to explain the nature, differences,
-causes, and importance of sleep and waking, I think is made clear
-enough by the fact that concerning them there is great doubt and
-dissension among the highest philosophers and physicians. For Galen,
-when he questioned what sleep was, and what waking, decided at length
-that he could not be certain in what order of phenomena to classify
-them. Aristotle indeed, in his definitions of sleep and waking,
-arranges them in different places. Judging from selected books of all
-authors, no one, in my opinion, has been able to enumerate the general
-differences of sleep and waking by any certain method. Alcmœn thinks
-sleep is produced when the blood in the veins flows back and becomes
-congested. Empedocles believes it to arise from the chilling of heat
-in the blood. Diogenes states that sleep is induced by the blood
-pushing to the inner cavities of the body the air that is introduced
-into bodies. Plato and the Stoics taught that it arose of itself by
-the letting go of the spirit (or the releasing of the breath) and the
-consequent relaxation.
-
-It is needless to refute the cause which Aristotle gives for sleep,
-and Galen for waking. They do not accord. The one thinks the true
-cause arises and has its seat in the heart,—the other in the brain. On
-account of which disagreement, great contention has been excited among
-more recent philosophers and physicians, as to which view to adhere
-to. Some attribute one significance, others another to these things.
-And so, because of the great difficulty introduced, there is nothing
-relative to the matter which is not in the deepest obscurity and doubt.
-A knowledge of this thing is, nevertheless, most useful, even if come
-upon by any other fortunate means, and not only through the knowledge
-of the doctors; by such means, for instance, as through the study of
-the general arts; for if it is joyful to philosophize, and to happen
-upon the hidden and abstruse things in the secret places of nature,—who
-would not find great pleasure in learning the causes of the sleeping
-and waking of creatures, why now they take long, now short sleeps;
-why at one time it is difficult to capture sleep,—at another time
-impossible to dispel it?
-
-We wonder how at one moment sleep leads to waking; how waking and
-sleeping mutually succeed each other; why diverse things serve to
-explain each other, as sleep, waking,—and waking, sleep.
-
-Sometimes these, sleep and waking, are injurious,—at other times
-beneficial. For sleep and also waking bring forth diseases, intensify
-them; both equally drive them away, soothe sorrows and likewise
-intensify them; by one and the other alike, morbid causes are often
-destroyed more effectually than by any other remedy; indeed, in
-conjunction with the benefit of these (sleep and waking), concoctions,
-food, purgatives, and finally all the functions of the different parts
-of the body may be exercised to the best advantage; nor is it possible,
-indeed, for a creature to live, or to maintain his life, without sleep
-and waking.
-
-There is no action of the body or mind which has greater values to the
-body, nothing which supplies more reliable signs for discerning bodily
-ills, and showing how to be rid of them.
-
-Of which things, indeed, the investigation and knowledge is
-most useful, and not without pleasure to those who delight in
-the understanding of things; that is what Aristotle, prince of
-philosophers, notices, when he writes his whole book concerning sleep
-and waking,—and often elsewhere at random in his writings. Not the
-less does Hippocrates notice them in his citations, for he wrote most
-sayings on the subject, so many that I omit them; and there are many
-in other books, of which a definite impression does not remain in my
-memory. But as I have said, when all, or certainly most writers on this
-subject may be perplexed with regard to these things, and involved in
-many difficulties, no one ought to condemn me, if, after them, and many
-men, I presume to write on this subject.
-
-
-CHAPTER I
-
-BY WHAT CAUSES AND MEANS SLEEP AND WAKING ARE PRODUCED, ACCORDING TO
-THE OPINION OF ARISTOTLE
-
-To refute the opinion of the philosophers concerning the causes of
-sleep and waking, I think superfluous; because, with Aristotle’s views
-surviving now many centuries, no authority among these other writers
-may be greater than his; and because the ignorant premises of the
-others makes all discussion of them become inane.
-
-Because of this I think I should be excused for introducing the opinion
-of Aristotle among all the philosophers, that is, for choosing it
-from among them, for if we show it to be equally probable with the
-others which we presume to refute, it will be because, unlike them, it
-extinguishes them by its own plausibility.
-
-Aristotle thinks sleep to be produced by a vapor generated by the heat
-energy in food, the fumes of which, rising to the brain, are there
-converted into moisture by the coldness of the brain itself, because,
-as he says, cold is felt at the contact just as rain is known to be
-made from vapor in contact with cold air; which moisture or humor,
-by force of gravity, is pushed downward, descends through the veins,
-drives the heat from the heart, and makes that cold also; whence, the
-cold spreading about, sleep, he says, generally arises.
-
-This moisture, or humor,—ought to be warm, he writes; when it is cold,
-sleep will not be produced,—just as those affected with sleepiness
-show that their systems are in warm and at the same time humid
-condition; and children, who have abundance of this warm moisture,
-sleep the most; whence he states that this sleep chill has in fact its
-causes at the outset in this very warmth. These things he discusses
-partly in the book on “Sleep and Waking,” partly in the second of
-“The Parts of Animals,” and in “Problems.” I am not able to judge
-concerning the first matter, the idea of giving a single cause of
-sleep. For, according to this author, waking brings sleep;[12] since
-even animals, by means of waking and exercising their functions are
-known to become quiet and sleep, and it is said by him, that since
-animals become helpless in sleep, this helplessness is produced by the
-excess of waking that precedes it.
-
-[12] It appears that Argenterio thinks Aristotle inconsistent in his
-proposition here.
-
-But not in waking, in food, or in this reason of generated vapor,
-is it possible to place the cause of sleep. Exercise produces this
-very effect. For through labor, deep and sweetest sleep falls upon
-the creatures; and this not on account of vapors rising from food,
-nor on account of a natural moisture, so much as by the violent
-exercise of the body. Foods that are cold or dried, as the hull of
-the mandrake,—taken into the body, induce sleep; which therefore is
-not accomplished because these foods give rise to vapors, since they
-would rather banish the vapors by their dryness; nor would these foods
-supply to the head what vapor is generated, since, repelled by the
-cold of such substances being taken into the body, the moisture would
-be repelled and chilled, and prevent the vapor from being carried to
-the brain. This would be so, as he says, only if the generation of
-vapors, and their ascent arose from the heating of this natural humor
-or moisture.
-
- * * * * *
-
-Other chapters of interest in Argenterio’s “Sleep and Waking” are:
-
- CHAPTER II: What may bring sleep, and by what method, according to
- Galen.
-
- CHAPTER III: The causes producing sleep, which are thought true.
-
- CHAPTER XI: In what way sleep may be produced from natural heat.
-
- CHAPTER XIII: Concerning natural causes of Sleep and Waking.
-
- CHAPTER XIV: Concerning unnatural causes of Sleep and Waking.
-
- CHAPTER XVII: Of causes of long and short sleep.
-
-
-
-
-APPENDIX D
-
-QUESTIONNAIRE ON SLEEP
-
-
-In order to get the facts about SLEEP we sent a question sheet to
-a large number of persons selected by classes. We began with a
-thousand professors in order to get suggestions which might make the
-investigation more useful. The following request was sent out:
-
-
-PLEASE FILL OUT AND RETURN—
-
-We shall be glad to supply additional copies of this slip upon
-request—we desire the largest number of replies possible and it is
-hoped the scientific interest of the subject will lead you to aid us in
-procuring them.
-
- Age Weight Height Health
-
- Married?
-
- Do you sleep well?
-
- How many waking hours in bed?
-
- How many hours’ sleep on an average, and at what
- times?
-
- What do you consider sufficient for yourself?
-
- Any difference during vacations?
-
- Do you use any means or devices for inducing sleep?
-
- Similar observations on members of your family, if
- any?
-
- Are your dreams usually rational or fantastic, pleasant
- or unpleasant?
-
- Do you have nightmare?
-
- Are you given to worry?
-
- Does physical, especially agricultural, work relieve
- this?
-
- Do you take artificial exercise, or does your work involve
- exercise?
-
- Appetite good? Simple diet or
- elaborate?
-
- Is the “sleep of the laboring man sweet” in reality?
-
- Name
-
- Profession
-
- Address
-
-No scientifically complete tabulation and study of data has yet been
-made on SLEEP.
-
-Moffat, Yard & Company is publishing a book entitled “The Gift of
-Sleep,” by Bolton Hall. For the purpose of this book it is desired
-to obtain full information concerning the amount of sleep needed
-by individuals in different walks of life, the circumstances under
-which the soundest and most restful sleep is obtained, and the amount
-necessary for individuals.
-
-You will confer a great favor if you will fill out this sheet and
-return to the publisher.
-
- Yours very truly,
- MOFFAT, YARD & COMPANY,
- 31 East Seventeenth Street,
- New York.
-
-
-ADDITIONAL REMARKS
-
-At the date of going to press we have not received answers sufficient
-in number to warrant very definite statements in regard to sleep and
-dreams. A thorough report must be reserved for a later edition. Nor was
-the time sufficient for the very considerable labor of examining and
-tabulating the replies. It appears, however, that about one person in
-thirty regards himself as a poor sleeper, and only two others in thirty
-will say they sleep only fairly well. About three persons out of five
-report that they spend no time in wakefulness in bed; the remaining
-two persons spend from fifteen minutes to five or six hours each, the
-average among this group being one hour and ten minutes per person per
-night. Among professors in our leading universities the prevailing hour
-for retiring is between 10 and 11 o’clock; four-fifths of this group
-say they retire either at 10, 10.30, or 11 o’clock; but this class of
-people retire on the average about one-half hour later than persons of
-the other classes from whom we have received replies.
-
-The average duration of sleep is, roughly, seven and one-half hours.
-One-third of all replies gave eight hours as the length of sleep; and
-the professors are inclined to sleep a slightly longer period than
-those in the other occupations taken together.
-
-The age of the individuals seemed to have no effect on the averages
-of the daily amount of time spent in sleep. Persons under the age of
-forty differed in no marked degree from persons over forty either in
-length of sleep or frequency of dreaming. There is general agreement
-on the point that they get just enough sleep, and that vacations make
-only a slight increase. The data is not yet sufficient to justify a
-conclusion as to the average time of sleep at different ages.
-
-In reference to dreams, about 15 per cent. report that they do not
-dream, and about 30 per cent. say they dream “rarely,” “seldom,” or
-“occasionally.” We are disposed to question these returns on the ground
-that they give an impression that dreams are less frequent than they
-really are. The investigations of most experimenters who have made
-special studies of dreams seem rather to show that the number of our
-dream-experiences grows as soon as we give our attention to them, just
-as, on a clear night, a hasty glance at the sky may reveal many stars,
-but a steady gaze reveals very many more.
-
-Our returns are interesting as to the character of the dreams. The
-favorite adjective used to describe dreams was “rational.” A lesser
-number of persons said their dreams were “pleasant,” less still
-that they were “fantastic.” Three times as many persons describe
-their dreams as pleasant than those who describe them as generally
-unpleasant. Either Professor Freud’s conclusion is correct, that we
-tend to forget unpleasant experiences more readily than pleasant ones,
-or else the dreams really afforded more pleasurable than they did
-disagreeable feelings. The most typical combination used to describe
-the nature of the individual’s dream-life was that it was “rational
-and pleasant.” Less than one-third of all the answerers confessed to
-having ever experienced nightmare.
-
-It should be observed that thus far we have encountered a group of
-replies from persons who, as a group, are remarkably healthy, normal,
-and fairly free from worry. Particularly, worry does not seem to be a
-vice of professors, as only 8 per cent. confess to it. About 17 per
-cent. of them say they need more physical exercise than they get, which
-is mostly walking. There is also a gratifying unanimity as to good
-appetite, simple diet, and absence of need for artificial means of
-inducing sleep.
-
-
-
-
-APPENDIX E
-
-BIBLIOGRAPHY
-
-
-It is surprising how little has been written about Sleep, and what a
-small part of what has been written is worth reading. Perhaps the best
-book, certainly the most exhaustive, is Marie Manacéïne’s “Sleep,”
-which contains a full but disorderly Bibliography.
-
-Except in the case of American works, which might easily have escaped
-Marie Manacéïne’s attention, I have not tried to go further back than
-that Bibliography, as she was most industrious in research; I have only
-cut out from her list what seemed the more obsolete or needless works.
-But with the help of A. T. Craig and others, I have carried it, as far
-as may be, down to date.
-
-
-Bibliography Selected from that Given in “Sleep” (Manacéïne).
-
- ABERCROMBIE: Inquiries Concerning the Intellectual Powers, p. 283 et
- seq., 1840.
-
- BAILLARGER: De l’influence de l’état intermédiare à la veille et au
- sommeil sur la production et la marche des hallucinations. _Annales
- Médico-psychologiques_, 1845, tome vi.
-
- BICHAT: Sur la Mort et la Vie. Paris.
-
- BRIERRE DE BOISMONT: Etude médico-légales sur les hallucinations et
- les illusions. _Annales d’hygiène publique et de médicin légale_,
- 1861, tome xvi.
-
- BROADBENT: Insomnia, _Lancet_, April, 1887.
-
- BURNHAM, W. H.: Memory, Historically and Experimentally Considered.
- Part III, Paramnesia, _Amer. Jour. of Psychol._, May, 1889.
-
- BYFORD: On the Physiology of Exercise. _Amer. Jour. of the Med.
- Sciences_, 1855, No. 59.
-
- On the Physiology of Repose or Sleep. _Amer. Jour. of the Med.
- Sciences_, April, 1856.
-
-CATLIN: Shut Your Mouth, 1870.
-
-CONDILLAC: Essai sur l’origine des connaisances humaines, Sect. I,
-chapter ix.
-
-CRICHTON-BROWNE, J.: Dreamy Mental States. _Lancet_, 1895, No. 3749.
-
-DELBOEUF: Le Sommeil et les Rêves.
-
-DE SANCTIS AND NEYROZ: Experimental Investigations Concerning the Depth
-of Sleep. _Psychol. Rev._, vol. ix, pp. 254-282. 1902.
-
-DUFAY: La notion de la personalité.
-
-DURHAM: The Physiology of Sleep.
-
- _Guy’s Hospital Reports_, vol. vi, 1860.
-
- _Psychol. Jour._, vol. v, p. 74 et seq.
-
-ERRERA, LEO: Sur le Mécanisme du Sommeil. Brussels, 1895.
-
-FAZIO: Sul Sonno naturale, studio teoretico sperimentale, _Il
-Morgagni_, 1874.
-
-FRÖLICH: Ueber den Schlaf, Berlin, 1799.
-
-FUCKER: Light of Nature Pursued, 1805, vol. i.
-
-GREENWOOD, FRED: Imagination in Dreams, and their Study, 1894.
-
-HAMMOND: On Wakefulness, 1866, 1873.
-
- Sleep and Its Derangements.
-
- A Treatise on Insanity, p. 115 et seq. Philadelphia, 1869.
-
-HARTMANN: Philosophy of the Unconscious.
-
-HENNE: Du Sommeil Naturel.
-
-HERBART: Sämtliche Werke, Bd. V., p. 541 et seq.
-
-HOWELL: A Contribution to the Theory of Sleep, _Jour. of Exper. Med._,
-1897.
-
-JUDÉE: De l’état de rêve. _Gazette des Hôspitaux_, 1856.
-
-LANGE: Geschichte des Materialismus, 1875. (English trans. by E. C.
-Thomas, 1881.)
-
-LEMOINE: Du sommeil au point de vue physiologique et psychologique,
-1855.
-
-LIÉBAULT: Du sommeil et des états analogues, 1866.
-
-MAUDESLEY: Body and Will, 1883.
-
-MEYER, BRUNO: Aus der Æsthetischen Pädagogik.
-
-MOORE, C. A.: On Going to Sleep, 1871.
-
-NAGEL: Der natürliche und künstliche Schlaf, 1872.
-
-NUDOW: Versuch einer Theorie des Schlafes, Königsberg, 1791, p. 129 et
-seq.
-
-PATRICK AND GILBERT: On the Effects of Loss of Sleep, _Psych. Rev._,
-Sept., 1896.
-
-PAULHAN, A.: De l’activité de l’esprit dans le rêve, _Revue Philos._,
-Nov., 1894, p. 546.
-
-PLATTNER: Von dem Schlaf der Kinder, welcher durch das Einwiegen
-hervorgebracht wird (1740).
-
-PIERROT: De l’insomnie, 1869.
-
-RADESTOCK: Schlaf und Traum, 1879.
-
- (In _Rev. Philos._), April, 1897: La rapidite de la pensée dans le
- rêve.
-
- Le sommeil et la cérébration inconsciente.
-
-SANCTIS, SANTE DE: I Sogni e il Sonno; I Sogni nei Deliquenti,
-_Archivio di Psichiatria_, 1896, vol. vi.
-
- Emozioni e Sogni. _Dritter Internationale Congress C Psychol._,
- Munich, 1897, p. 348.
-
-SCHERNER: Das Leben des Traumes, 1861.
-
-SCHUBERT: Geschichte der Seele, p. 420 et seq.
-
-SERGUÉJEFF: Physiol. de la Veille et du Sommeil, t. i. and ii., 1890.
-
-SIEBECK: Das Traumleben der Seele.
-
-STEWART, DUGALD: Handbook of the Philosophy of the Human Mind.
-
-STRÜMPELL: Die Natur und Entstehung der Träume.
-
-SULLY, J.: The Human Mind, vol. ii.
-
- Illusions, International Scientific Series.
-
- Dream, (Article) Encyclop. Brit.
-
- The Dream as a Revelation, _Fortnightly Rev._, March, 1893.
-
-SYMONDS, J. A.: Sleep and Dreams, 1851.
-
-TARCHANOFF: Observations sur le sommeil normal. _Atti dell’ XI
-Congresso Med._, Roma, 1894, vol. ii.
-
-VERITY: Subject and Object as Connected with our Double Brain, 1872.
-
-VOLKELT: Die Traum-Phantasie, 1875.
-
-WALSH: On Sleep, _Lancet_, 1846, vol. ii., p. 181.
-
-WEYGANDT: Entstehung der Träume, 1893.
-
-WIGAN, A. L.: The Duality of Mind, 1844.
-
-WILKS, SAMUEL: On the Nature of Dreams, _Med. Mag._, Feb., 1894.
-
- On Overwork, The _Lancet_, June 26, 1875.
-
-
-ADDITIONAL BIBLIOGRAPHY
-
- ACKLAND, THEODORE DYKE: Circular letters relating to hours of sleep
- necessary for schoolboys (particularly in English public schools),
- 1905.
-
- ALSBERG, MORITZ: Die protoplasmatische Bewegung der
- Nervenzellenfortsätze in ihren Beziehungen zum Schlaf. _Deutsche
- Gesellsch. f. Anthrop._
-
- Ethnol. u. Urgeschichte, _Correspondenzblatt_, vol. xxxii, pp. 2-8,
- München, 1901.
-
- ANASTAY, E.: L’origine biologique du Sommeil et de l’hypnose,
- _Archives de Psychol._, Paris, 1908, vol. viii, pp. 63-76.
-
- ARGENTERIO (GIOVANNI): De somno et vigilia, libri duo, in quibus
- continentur duae tractationes de calido nativo et de spiritibus.
- (Florentiae, 1556.)
-
- ARUNACHALAM, P.: Luminous Sleep, _Westminster Rev._, vol. clviii, pp.
- 566-574, London, 1902.
-
- BERGER, E., and LOEWY, ROBERT: L’état des yeux pendant le sommeil et
- de la théorie du sommeil. _Jour. de l’anatomie et de la physiologie_,
- Paris, 1898, vol. xxxiv, pp. 364-418.
-
- BIGELOW, JOHN: The Mystery of Sleep. Harper & Bros., New York, 1903
- (2nd edition).
-
- BINNS, EDWARD: The Anatomy of Sleep, or the Art of Producing Sound and
- Refreshing Slumber at Will. London, 1842.
-
- BRUSH, C. E., JR., and FAYERWEATHER, R.: Observations on the Changes
- in Blood Pressure During Normal Sleep. _Amer. Jour. of Physiol._, vol.
- v, pp. 199-210, 1901.
-
- CALKINS, MARY W.: Statistics of Dreams, _Amer. Jour. Psychol._, vol.
- v, pp. 311-343. 1893. Investigation of over 500 dreams showing the
- relative frequency of different sorts of sense imagery.
-
- CLAPARÈDE, EDOUARD: La fonction du sommeil, _Riv. d. sci._, Bologna,
- 1907, vol. ii, pp. 143-160.
-
- CORNING, J. LEONARD: Brain-rest, Being a Disquisition on the Curative
- Properties of Prolonged Sleep. New York, Putnams, 1885.
-
- DEMOOR, JEAN: La plasticité des neurones le mécanisme du sommeil,
- _Bull. de la Soc. d’anthropologie de Bruxelles_, vol. xv, pp. 70-83.
-
- DONALDSON, H. H.: The Growth of the Brain, chapter xvi, p. 309.
- Scribner’s Sons, New York, 1897.
-
- ELLIS, HAVELOCK: The Stuff that Dreams are Made of. _Pop. Sci.
- Monthly_, 1899, pp. 721-735. Man and Woman, chapter xii. 1894.
-
- FISHER, IRVING: Report on National Vitality, Govt. Printing Office,
- Washington, D. C. 1909.
-
- FOSGATE, B.: Sleep Psychologically Considered with Reference to
- Sensation and Memory. New York, 1850.
-
- FOSTER, HENRY HUBBARD: The Necessity of a New Standpoint in Sleep
- Theories. _Amer. Jour. of Psychol._, vol. xii, pp. 145-177, 1901.
-
- FRENSBURG, DR. J.: Schlaf und Traum. Article in: _Sammlung_ (R.
- Virchow und Fr. v. Holkendorff), 20th Series, Bk. 466, Berlin, 1885.
-
- FREUD, S.: Die Traumdeutung. Leipsic, 1909.
-
- GEMELLI, AGNOSTINO: Fatti ed ipotesi nello studio del sonno. _Rivista
- di fisica mat. e sci. Nat._, vol. xiv, pp. 48-77, Pavia, 1906.
-
- HALL, W. W.: Sleep—or: The Hygiene of the Night. First edition 1861,
- New York (5 or 6 editions), one edition 1870, published by Hurd and
- Houghton, New York.
-
- HEUBEL, E.: _Pflüger’s Archiv_, xiv, S. 186.
-
- JASTROW, J.: The Subconscious, Chapter on Dream-consciousness, pp.
- 175-265. 1906.
-
- JUDD, C. H.: _Psychology_, Pt. I., Chapter xiv, pp. 337 et seq. Giving
- a clear account of sleep in relation to other states of consciousness,
- 1907.
-
- KOHLSCHUTTER: Messungen der Festigkeit des Schlafes, _Zeitschrift für
- rationelle Medicin_, 1863; Mechanik des Schlafes, _Zeitsch. f. r. M._,
- 1869. (His results are very similar to those of Michelson in Art.
- Tiefe des Schlafes.)
-
- LAFITTE, JEAN PAUL: Pourquoi dormons nous? (_Rev. d. mois_, vol. ii,
- Année 1, No. 10, pp. 461-475.)
-
- MACNISH, ROBERT: The Philosophy of Sleep. London, 1838.
-
- MANACÉÏNE, M. DE: Sleep. Walter Scott Ltd., London, 1897. (The
- Contemp. Sc. Series.)
-
- MICHAELIS, ADOLF ALFRED, 1854: Der Schlaf nach seiner Bedeutung für
- den gesunden und kranken Menschen. Eine physiologisch-pathologische
- Abhandlung. Leipzig, 1894.
-
- MICHELSON, EDWARD: Untersuchungen über die Tiefe des Schlafes,
- _Psycholog. Arbeiten_, vol. ii, pp. 81-117. Leipzig, 1899.
-
- MOLL, A.: Hypnotism. Scribner’s Sons, New York, 1909.
-
- MORTIMER, GRANVILLE J.: Sleep and Sleeplessness. S. E. Cassino, 1881.
- Boston. D. Bogue, London.
-
- OPPENHEIMER, Z.: Zur Physiol. des Schlafes. _Archives f. Anatomie u.
- Physiol._ 1902, Leipzig.
-
- PARISH, E.: Hallucinations and Illusions. Scribner’s Sons. New York,
- 1897.
-
- PHILIP, A. P. W.: An Inquiry Into the Nature of Sleep and Death.
- London, 1834.
-
- PICTON, NINA: The Panorama of Sleep; or Soul and Symbol. Philosophic
- Co., New York, 1903.
-
- PIERON, HENRI: La Polygenèse des états de sommeil (Assoc. française p.
- l’avancement de sci. Compte rendu pt. 2). Notes et mém. Paris, 1908,
- Sess. 36 (1907), pp. 672-678.
-
- PILEZ, ALEXANDRE: Quelques contributions à la psychol. du
- sommeil chez les sains d’esprit et chez les aliénés. _Annales
- médico-psychologiques._ Sér. 8, vol. ix, pp. 66-75. Paris, 1899.
-
- La Plasticité des Neurones et la mécanisme du Sommeil. _Bull. de la
- Soc. d’Anthrop. de Bruxelles_, vol. xv, 1896-7.
-
- POWELL, REV. LYMAN PIERCE: The Art of Natural Sleep,—with different
- directions for the wholesome cure of sleeplessness. G. P. Putnam’s
- Sons, 1908.
-
- PREYER, W.: Ueber die Ursache des Schlafes. 1877.
-
- ROSENBAUM, E.: Warum müssen wir schlafen?
- Eine neue Theorie des Schlafes. Berlin, O. Hirschwald, 1892.
-
- SCHLEICH, KARL LUDWIG: Schlaf und Traum. _Die Zukunft_, Jahrg. 8, vol.
- xxix, pp. 14-27. Berlin, 1899.
-
- SCHULTZ, PAUL: Schlaf und Ermüdung, _Deutsche Rev._, Jahrg. 24, vol.
- iii, pp. 81-92. Stuttgart, 1899.
-
- SIDIS, BORIS: An Experimental Study of Sleep. Badger, Boston, 1909.
-
- STILES, PERCY G.: Theories of Sleep, _Pop. Sci. Monthly_, vol. lxiii,
- pp. 432-438. New York, 1903.
-
- STRÜMPELL, A.: _Pflüger’s Archiv_, xv, S. 573. Contains an account of
- Caspar Hauser, mentioned on p. 78 of this book.
-
- SURBLED: Les Théories du Sommeil, _Rev. d. questions scientif._, Sér.
- 2, vol. xviii (1900), pp. 40-78.
-
- TAYLOR, J. MADISON: Sleep and Its Regulation, _Pop. Sci. Monthly_, vol.
- lxvii, pp. 409-422. New York, 1905.
-
- TUKE, D. HACK: Articles on “Sleep” and “Dreaming” in _Dict. of
- Psychological Medicine_, 1892.
-
- WEYER, EDWARD M.: “Dreams,” in _Forum_, May, 1911.
-
- WEYGANDT, WILHELM: Experimentelle Beiträge zur Psychologie des
- Schlafes, _Zeitschr. für Psychol. und Physiol. d. Sinnesorgane_, vol.
- xxxix, pp. 1-41. Leipzig, 1905.
-
- WUNDT, W.: Grundzüge der physiologischen Psychologie, cap. xix, Schlaf
- und Traum.
-
-
-SOME OTHER BOOKS AND MONOGRAPHS USED IN THE PREPARATION OF “THE
-GIFT OF SLEEP.”
-
-CAMP, CARL D.: Morbid Sleepiness, _Jour. Abnormal
-Psychology_, 1907.
-
-ELWIN, FOUNTAIN HASTINGS: Mens Corporis.
-
-FLETCHER, HORACE: The A. B. Z. of Our Nutrition.
-
-GRANVILLE, MORTIMER: Sleep and Sleeplessness.
-
-HAMMOND, W. A.: Sleep and Its Derangements.
-
-HASKELL, N. W.: Perfect Health: How to Get It and How to Keep It, by
-One Who Has It.
-
-METCHNIKOFF: The Nature of Man.
- The Prolongation of Life.
-
-MCCARTHY, D. J.: Narcolepsy, _Amer. Jour. Medical Science_, 1900.
-
-QUACKENBOS, JOHN D., A.M., M.D.: Hypnotism in Mental and Moral Culture.
-
-ROWLAND, ELEANOR H.: A Case of Visual Sensations During Sleep, _Jour.
-of Philosophical, Psychological, and Scientific Methods_.
-
-SCHOLZ, F.: Sleep and Dreams.
-
-THOMPSON, SIR HENRY, M.D.: Diet in Relation to Age and Activity.
-
-UPSON, DR.: Insomnia and Nerve Strain.
-
-WORCESTER, MCCOMB, AND CORIAT: Religion and Medicine.
-
-*** END OF THE PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK THE PSYCHOLOGY OF SLEEP ***
-
-***** This file should be named 64138-0.txt or 64138-0.zip *****
-This and all associated files of various formats will be found in:
- https://www.gutenberg.org/6/4/1/3/64138/
-
-Updated editions will replace the previous one--the old editions will
-be renamed.
-
-Creating the works from print editions not protected by U.S. copyright
-law means that no one owns a United States copyright in these works,
-so the Foundation (and you!) can copy and distribute it in the United
-States without permission and without paying copyright
-royalties. Special rules, set forth in the General Terms of Use part
-of this license, apply to copying and distributing Project
-Gutenberg-tm electronic works to protect the PROJECT GUTENBERG-tm
-concept and trademark. Project Gutenberg is a registered trademark,
-and may not be used if you charge for the eBooks, unless you receive
-specific permission. If you do not charge anything for copies of this
-eBook, complying with the rules is very easy. You may use this eBook
-for nearly any purpose such as creation of derivative works, reports,
-performances and research. They may be modified and printed and given
-away--you may do practically ANYTHING in the United States with eBooks
-not protected by U.S. copyright law. Redistribution is subject to the
-trademark license, especially commercial redistribution.
-
-START: FULL LICENSE
-
-THE FULL PROJECT GUTENBERG LICENSE
-PLEASE READ THIS BEFORE YOU DISTRIBUTE OR USE THIS WORK
-
-To protect the Project Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting the free
-distribution of electronic works, by using or distributing this work
-(or any other work associated in any way with the phrase "Project
-Gutenberg"), you agree to comply with all the terms of the Full
-Project Gutenberg-tm License available with this file or online at
-www.gutenberg.org/license.
-
-Section 1. General Terms of Use and Redistributing Project
-Gutenberg-tm electronic works
-
-1.A. By reading or using any part of this Project Gutenberg-tm
-electronic work, you indicate that you have read, understand, agree to
-and accept all the terms of this license and intellectual property
-(trademark/copyright) agreement. If you do not agree to abide by all
-the terms of this agreement, you must cease using and return or
-destroy all copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in your
-possession. If you paid a fee for obtaining a copy of or access to a
-Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work and you do not agree to be bound
-by the terms of this agreement, you may obtain a refund from the
-person or entity to whom you paid the fee as set forth in paragraph
-1.E.8.
-
-1.B. "Project Gutenberg" is a registered trademark. It may only be
-used on or associated in any way with an electronic work by people who
-agree to be bound by the terms of this agreement. There are a few
-things that you can do with most Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works
-even without complying with the full terms of this agreement. See
-paragraph 1.C below. There are a lot of things you can do with Project
-Gutenberg-tm electronic works if you follow the terms of this
-agreement and help preserve free future access to Project Gutenberg-tm
-electronic works. See paragraph 1.E below.
-
-1.C. The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation ("the
-Foundation" or PGLAF), owns a compilation copyright in the collection
-of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works. Nearly all the individual
-works in the collection are in the public domain in the United
-States. If an individual work is unprotected by copyright law in the
-United States and you are located in the United States, we do not
-claim a right to prevent you from copying, distributing, performing,
-displaying or creating derivative works based on the work as long as
-all references to Project Gutenberg are removed. Of course, we hope
-that you will support the Project Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting
-free access to electronic works by freely sharing Project Gutenberg-tm
-works in compliance with the terms of this agreement for keeping the
-Project Gutenberg-tm name associated with the work. You can easily
-comply with the terms of this agreement by keeping this work in the
-same format with its attached full Project Gutenberg-tm License when
-you share it without charge with others.
-
-1.D. The copyright laws of the place where you are located also govern
-what you can do with this work. Copyright laws in most countries are
-in a constant state of change. If you are outside the United States,
-check the laws of your country in addition to the terms of this
-agreement before downloading, copying, displaying, performing,
-distributing or creating derivative works based on this work or any
-other Project Gutenberg-tm work. The Foundation makes no
-representations concerning the copyright status of any work in any
-country outside the United States.
-
-1.E. Unless you have removed all references to Project Gutenberg:
-
-1.E.1. The following sentence, with active links to, or other
-immediate access to, the full Project Gutenberg-tm License must appear
-prominently whenever any copy of a Project Gutenberg-tm work (any work
-on which the phrase "Project Gutenberg" appears, or with which the
-phrase "Project Gutenberg" is associated) is accessed, displayed,
-performed, viewed, copied or distributed:
-
- This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere in the United States and
- most other parts of the world at no cost and with almost no
- restrictions whatsoever. You may copy it, give it away or re-use it
- under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included with this
- eBook or online at www.gutenberg.org. If you are not located in the
- United States, you will have to check the laws of the country where
- you are located before using this eBook.
-
-1.E.2. If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is
-derived from texts not protected by U.S. copyright law (does not
-contain a notice indicating that it is posted with permission of the
-copyright holder), the work can be copied and distributed to anyone in
-the United States without paying any fees or charges. If you are
-redistributing or providing access to a work with the phrase "Project
-Gutenberg" associated with or appearing on the work, you must comply
-either with the requirements of paragraphs 1.E.1 through 1.E.7 or
-obtain permission for the use of the work and the Project Gutenberg-tm
-trademark as set forth in paragraphs 1.E.8 or 1.E.9.
-
-1.E.3. If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is posted
-with the permission of the copyright holder, your use and distribution
-must comply with both paragraphs 1.E.1 through 1.E.7 and any
-additional terms imposed by the copyright holder. Additional terms
-will be linked to the Project Gutenberg-tm License for all works
-posted with the permission of the copyright holder found at the
-beginning of this work.
-
-1.E.4. Do not unlink or detach or remove the full Project Gutenberg-tm
-License terms from this work, or any files containing a part of this
-work or any other work associated with Project Gutenberg-tm.
-
-1.E.5. Do not copy, display, perform, distribute or redistribute this
-electronic work, or any part of this electronic work, without
-prominently displaying the sentence set forth in paragraph 1.E.1 with
-active links or immediate access to the full terms of the Project
-Gutenberg-tm License.
-
-1.E.6. You may convert to and distribute this work in any binary,
-compressed, marked up, nonproprietary or proprietary form, including
-any word processing or hypertext form. However, if you provide access
-to or distribute copies of a Project Gutenberg-tm work in a format
-other than "Plain Vanilla ASCII" or other format used in the official
-version posted on the official Project Gutenberg-tm web site
-(www.gutenberg.org), you must, at no additional cost, fee or expense
-to the user, provide a copy, a means of exporting a copy, or a means
-of obtaining a copy upon request, of the work in its original "Plain
-Vanilla ASCII" or other form. Any alternate format must include the
-full Project Gutenberg-tm License as specified in paragraph 1.E.1.
-
-1.E.7. Do not charge a fee for access to, viewing, displaying,
-performing, copying or distributing any Project Gutenberg-tm works
-unless you comply with paragraph 1.E.8 or 1.E.9.
-
-1.E.8. You may charge a reasonable fee for copies of or providing
-access to or distributing Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works
-provided that
-
-* You pay a royalty fee of 20% of the gross profits you derive from
- the use of Project Gutenberg-tm works calculated using the method
- you already use to calculate your applicable taxes. The fee is owed
- to the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark, but he has
- agreed to donate royalties under this paragraph to the Project
- Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation. Royalty payments must be paid
- within 60 days following each date on which you prepare (or are
- legally required to prepare) your periodic tax returns. Royalty
- payments should be clearly marked as such and sent to the Project
- Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation at the address specified in
- Section 4, "Information about donations to the Project Gutenberg
- Literary Archive Foundation."
-
-* You provide a full refund of any money paid by a user who notifies
- you in writing (or by e-mail) within 30 days of receipt that s/he
- does not agree to the terms of the full Project Gutenberg-tm
- License. You must require such a user to return or destroy all
- copies of the works possessed in a physical medium and discontinue
- all use of and all access to other copies of Project Gutenberg-tm
- works.
-
-* You provide, in accordance with paragraph 1.F.3, a full refund of
- any money paid for a work or a replacement copy, if a defect in the
- electronic work is discovered and reported to you within 90 days of
- receipt of the work.
-
-* You comply with all other terms of this agreement for free
- distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm works.
-
-1.E.9. If you wish to charge a fee or distribute a Project
-Gutenberg-tm electronic work or group of works on different terms than
-are set forth in this agreement, you must obtain permission in writing
-from both the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation and The
-Project Gutenberg Trademark LLC, the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm
-trademark. Contact the Foundation as set forth in Section 3 below.
-
-1.F.
-
-1.F.1. Project Gutenberg volunteers and employees expend considerable
-effort to identify, do copyright research on, transcribe and proofread
-works not protected by U.S. copyright law in creating the Project
-Gutenberg-tm collection. Despite these efforts, Project Gutenberg-tm
-electronic works, and the medium on which they may be stored, may
-contain "Defects," such as, but not limited to, incomplete, inaccurate
-or corrupt data, transcription errors, a copyright or other
-intellectual property infringement, a defective or damaged disk or
-other medium, a computer virus, or computer codes that damage or
-cannot be read by your equipment.
-
-1.F.2. LIMITED WARRANTY, DISCLAIMER OF DAMAGES - Except for the "Right
-of Replacement or Refund" described in paragraph 1.F.3, the Project
-Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation, the owner of the Project
-Gutenberg-tm trademark, and any other party distributing a Project
-Gutenberg-tm electronic work under this agreement, disclaim all
-liability to you for damages, costs and expenses, including legal
-fees. YOU AGREE THAT YOU HAVE NO REMEDIES FOR NEGLIGENCE, STRICT
-LIABILITY, BREACH OF WARRANTY OR BREACH OF CONTRACT EXCEPT THOSE
-PROVIDED IN PARAGRAPH 1.F.3. YOU AGREE THAT THE FOUNDATION, THE
-TRADEMARK OWNER, AND ANY DISTRIBUTOR UNDER THIS AGREEMENT WILL NOT BE
-LIABLE TO YOU FOR ACTUAL, DIRECT, INDIRECT, CONSEQUENTIAL, PUNITIVE OR
-INCIDENTAL DAMAGES EVEN IF YOU GIVE NOTICE OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH
-DAMAGE.
-
-1.F.3. LIMITED RIGHT OF REPLACEMENT OR REFUND - If you discover a
-defect in this electronic work within 90 days of receiving it, you can
-receive a refund of the money (if any) you paid for it by sending a
-written explanation to the person you received the work from. If you
-received the work on a physical medium, you must return the medium
-with your written explanation. The person or entity that provided you
-with the defective work may elect to provide a replacement copy in
-lieu of a refund. If you received the work electronically, the person
-or entity providing it to you may choose to give you a second
-opportunity to receive the work electronically in lieu of a refund. If
-the second copy is also defective, you may demand a refund in writing
-without further opportunities to fix the problem.
-
-1.F.4. Except for the limited right of replacement or refund set forth
-in paragraph 1.F.3, this work is provided to you 'AS-IS', WITH NO
-OTHER WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT
-LIMITED TO WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR ANY PURPOSE.
-
-1.F.5. Some states do not allow disclaimers of certain implied
-warranties or the exclusion or limitation of certain types of
-damages. If any disclaimer or limitation set forth in this agreement
-violates the law of the state applicable to this agreement, the
-agreement shall be interpreted to make the maximum disclaimer or
-limitation permitted by the applicable state law. The invalidity or
-unenforceability of any provision of this agreement shall not void the
-remaining provisions.
-
-1.F.6. INDEMNITY - You agree to indemnify and hold the Foundation, the
-trademark owner, any agent or employee of the Foundation, anyone
-providing copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in
-accordance with this agreement, and any volunteers associated with the
-production, promotion and distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm
-electronic works, harmless from all liability, costs and expenses,
-including legal fees, that arise directly or indirectly from any of
-the following which you do or cause to occur: (a) distribution of this
-or any Project Gutenberg-tm work, (b) alteration, modification, or
-additions or deletions to any Project Gutenberg-tm work, and (c) any
-Defect you cause.
-
-Section 2. Information about the Mission of Project Gutenberg-tm
-
-Project Gutenberg-tm is synonymous with the free distribution of
-electronic works in formats readable by the widest variety of
-computers including obsolete, old, middle-aged and new computers. It
-exists because of the efforts of hundreds of volunteers and donations
-from people in all walks of life.
-
-Volunteers and financial support to provide volunteers with the
-assistance they need are critical to reaching Project Gutenberg-tm's
-goals and ensuring that the Project Gutenberg-tm collection will
-remain freely available for generations to come. In 2001, the Project
-Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation was created to provide a secure
-and permanent future for Project Gutenberg-tm and future
-generations. To learn more about the Project Gutenberg Literary
-Archive Foundation and how your efforts and donations can help, see
-Sections 3 and 4 and the Foundation information page at
-www.gutenberg.org
-
-Section 3. Information about the Project Gutenberg Literary
-Archive Foundation
-
-The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation is a non profit
-501(c)(3) educational corporation organized under the laws of the
-state of Mississippi and granted tax exempt status by the Internal
-Revenue Service. The Foundation's EIN or federal tax identification
-number is 64-6221541. Contributions to the Project Gutenberg Literary
-Archive Foundation are tax deductible to the full extent permitted by
-U.S. federal laws and your state's laws.
-
-The Foundation's principal office is in Fairbanks, Alaska, with the
-mailing address: PO Box 750175, Fairbanks, AK 99775, but its
-volunteers and employees are scattered throughout numerous
-locations. Its business office is located at 809 North 1500 West, Salt
-Lake City, UT 84116, (801) 596-1887. Email contact links and up to
-date contact information can be found at the Foundation's web site and
-official page at www.gutenberg.org/contact
-
-For additional contact information:
-
- Dr. Gregory B. Newby
- Chief Executive and Director
- gbnewby@pglaf.org
-
-Section 4. Information about Donations to the Project Gutenberg
-Literary Archive Foundation
-
-Project Gutenberg-tm depends upon and cannot survive without wide
-spread public support and donations to carry out its mission of
-increasing the number of public domain and licensed works that can be
-freely distributed in machine readable form accessible by the widest
-array of equipment including outdated equipment. Many small donations
-($1 to $5,000) are particularly important to maintaining tax exempt
-status with the IRS.
-
-The Foundation is committed to complying with the laws regulating
-charities and charitable donations in all 50 states of the United
-States. Compliance requirements are not uniform and it takes a
-considerable effort, much paperwork and many fees to meet and keep up
-with these requirements. We do not solicit donations in locations
-where we have not received written confirmation of compliance. To SEND
-DONATIONS or determine the status of compliance for any particular
-state visit www.gutenberg.org/donate
-
-While we cannot and do not solicit contributions from states where we
-have not met the solicitation requirements, we know of no prohibition
-against accepting unsolicited donations from donors in such states who
-approach us with offers to donate.
-
-International donations are gratefully accepted, but we cannot make
-any statements concerning tax treatment of donations received from
-outside the United States. U.S. laws alone swamp our small staff.
-
-Please check the Project Gutenberg Web pages for current donation
-methods and addresses. Donations are accepted in a number of other
-ways including checks, online payments and credit card donations. To
-donate, please visit: www.gutenberg.org/donate
-
-Section 5. General Information About Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works
-
-Professor Michael S. Hart was the originator of the Project
-Gutenberg-tm concept of a library of electronic works that could be
-freely shared with anyone. For forty years, he produced and
-distributed Project Gutenberg-tm eBooks with only a loose network of
-volunteer support.
-
-Project Gutenberg-tm eBooks are often created from several printed
-editions, all of which are confirmed as not protected by copyright in
-the U.S. unless a copyright notice is included. Thus, we do not
-necessarily keep eBooks in compliance with any particular paper
-edition.
-
-Most people start at our Web site which has the main PG search
-facility: www.gutenberg.org
-
-This Web site includes information about Project Gutenberg-tm,
-including how to make donations to the Project Gutenberg Literary
-Archive Foundation, how to help produce our new eBooks, and how to
-subscribe to our email newsletter to hear about new eBooks.